giao an tieng anh

Bạn đang xem bản rút gọn của tài liệu. Xem và tải ngay bản đầy đủ của tài liệu tại đây (3.42 MB, 187 trang )

(1)Week: 01 Period 1+ 2 Híng dÉn häc - Làm quen Tiếng Anh Date of planning: 01/08/2013 Date of teaching: I. Môc tiªu chung cña m«n häc TiÕng Anh. - H×nh thµnh vµ ph¸t triÓn ë häc sinh nh÷ng kiÕn thøc , kü n¨ng c¬ b¶n vÒ TiÕng Anh vµ nh÷ng phẩm chất trí tuệ cần thiết để tiếp tục học hoặc đi vào cuộc sống lao động. II. Môc tiªu cô thÓ. - Học xong THCS , HS nắm đợc kiến thức cơ bản , tối thiểu và tơng đối hệ thống về Tiếng Anh thực hành hiện đại, phù hợp lứa tuổi. - Có kỹ năng cơ bản sử dụng T.Anh nh một công cụ gioa tiếp đơn giản dới các dạng : Nghe - nói - đọc – viết. - Cã sù hiÓu biÕt kh¸i qu¸t vÒ v¨n ho¸ cña c¸c níc sö dông TiÕng Anh. - H×nh thµnh c¸c kü n¨ng häc tiÕng vµ ph¸t triÓn t duy .Nh÷ng kü n¨ng nµy sÏ gióp ph¸t triÓn khả năng sử dụng tiếng mẹ đẻ và góp phần hình thành năng lực ngôn ngữ toàn diện hơn cho học sinh. III. CÊu tróc s¸ch TiÕng Anh 6. *Gi¸o viªn giíi thiÖu cho häc sinh: - Cuốn Tiếng Anh 6 gồm 16 đơn vị bài học ( Units), mỗi bài học tơng ứng với một chủ đề và đợc chia làm nhiều tiết học đợc phát triển theo trình tự các chủ đề. - Ch¬ng tr×nh häc trong n¨m: C¶ n¨m: 105 tiÕt/ 37 tuÇn. K× I : 54 tiÕt/19 tuÇn. K× II : 51 tiÕt/18 tuÇn. - §iÓm : M: 2 15’ : 2 V: 2 HK: 1 - Có đầy đủ trang thiết bị, dồ dùng học tập: Máy cát sét, tranh ảnh, đồ vật minh hoạ cho các nội dung gi¶ng d¹y. IV. Häc sinh: - Học sinh phải là chủ thể của hoạt động học tập: có động cơ học tập đúng đắn, tích cực & chủ động tiếp thu kiến thức, chăm chỉ hoạt động tham gia các hoạt động giao tiếp, mạnh dạn tích cực & có chủ định, có sáng tạo sử dụng Tiếng Anh trong hoạt động giao tiếp. - Kết hợp hoạt động học tập trên lớp và làm bài tập ở nhà. - Học sinh tham gia hoạt động học tập dới sự hớng dẫn của giáo viên. 1. Có đầy đủ sách vở, đồ dùng học tập phục vụ cho môn học Tiếng Anh 6. ( SGK, sách bài tập, sách bổ trợ và nâng cao, một số sách tham khảo, có thể dùng đài băng để luyÖn nghe ë nhµ) V. C¸ch häc: - Học đi đôi với hành, chăm chỉ học tập - Đọc, nói Tiếng Anh rõ ràng, chính xác, đúng trọng âm. - Viết rõ ràng, liền nét, đúng chính tả. - Kết hợp hoạt động trên lớp và làm bài tập ở nhà và giao tiếp với mọi ngời trong thực tế. - Có kĩ năng cơ bản sử dụng Tiếng Anh nh một công cụ giao tiếp ở mức độ đơn giản dới dạng: nghe- nói- đọc- viết. * Gi¸o viªn giíi thiÖu víi häc sinh mét sè c©u giao tiÐp b»ng TiÕng Anh thêng dïng trong mçi tiÕt häc. - Keep silent. - May I go out? - May I come in? - Thank you./ Ok. - Do you know?/ understand? - Sit down, please. - Stand up, please. * Self – evaluation: …………………………………………………………………………………………………… …………………………………………………………………………………………………… …………………………………………………………………………………………………….

(2) Week: 01 Period 3 Date of planning: 01/08/2013 Date of teaching:. Unit 1 : Greetings. Section :A 1,2,3,4. I. Objectives: 1. Knowledge - By the end of the lesson, Sts wil be able to know how to greet with : “ Hi / Hello” and to introduce yourself with “ I am…../ My name’s…..” . count numbers from “ 0” to “ 5” 2. Skills: listening, reading, writing 3. Behavior: II. Teaching aids: - Teacher: textbooks, poster, a tape, a stereo. - Student: textbook, ……. III. Steps of teaching: Teacher’s activities I. Warm up. (5’) - T. checks sts’ tools ( textbooks, notebooks, fountain pen, ruler….) II. Presentation: (10’) 1.Pre- teach vocab: Elicit from Sts, - hello (v): xin chµo (mime) - hi (v) : xin chao (mime) - I (pro) (expl) - “ oh” :0 four: 4 - one : 1 five : 5 - two :2 - three : 3 * Check vocab: R.O.R 2. Dialogue build.(A1.2) - Set the scene - Give the instruction a, Lan: …….. I’m ……… Nam:…….. Nga. b, Ba: Hello. My name…... Nam: …… Nam. * Make an exchange: T-wc, H- H, open pairs, closed pairs - Get sts to go to the board to write the missing words. * Concept check: - Meaning: - Form: Hi. I’m … Hello. My name is…. - Use: để chào và giới thiệu tên. - Pronunciation. III. Practise.( A3-4).(20’) - Get sts to greet and introduce each other. * Dictation.. Ss’ activities. Write on the board. -T – Wc - Listen and give the answers. - Listen and repeat then copy.. 1-Vocabs - hello (v): xin chµo - hi (v) : xin chµo - I (pro) - “ oh” :0 - one : 1 - two :2 - three : 3 - four: 4 - five : 5 - Go to the board and 2. Dialogue build.(A1.2) rewrite. a, Lan: …. I’m … - Listen to the T. Nam:…. … Nga. b, Ba: Hello. My name…. Nam: …. … Nam. Form: Hi. I’m … Hello. My name - Practice . is… - Go to the board and - Use: để chào và giới thiÖu tªn. fill - Pronunciation. the missing words. - Listen and repeat then copy..

(3) - T. reads some numbers then ask Sts to listen and write individually then pair compare. Three, five, four, oh, two, one. Four-five-three, three-two-oh + Get some Sts to read out. * Word cue drill: T. gives instrction. - Run through the cues: Quang Ninh / 033 -Hue/054 Hai Phong/031 - Ha Noi/ 04 Hai Duong /0320 - T. models: S1: Quang Ninh, please? S2: Oh –three –three. - Make an exchange : T – Wc, H – H, open pairs, close pairs. IV. Further practise. (7’) * Guessing game: - T. gives instruction + check 0320 . * Ex: S1: 0h – three – three. Nam: No. S2: 0h – four. Nam: No. S3: 0h – three – two – 0h. Nam: Yes.. - Pair work. - Listen to the T and write the correct answers individually then pair compairs. - Listen to the T. - Run through.. - Listen and repeat.. - Practice. - Listen to the T. - T – Wc.. * Homework:(3’) - Learn by heart the new words and some structures. - Practice greeting and intrroducing with your friends - Do Ex. 1, 2 (P.4) - Prepare the new lesson: A 5 -8 (P.213).. IV. Homework: - Learn by heart the new words and some structures. - Practice greeting and intrroducing with your friends - Do Ex. 1, 2 (P.4) - Prepare the new lesson: A 5 -8 (P.2-13).. * Self – evaluation: …………………………………………………………………………………………………… …………………………………………………………………………………………………… ……………………………………………………………………………………………………. Week: 02 Period: 4 Date of planning : 01/08/2013 Date of teaching : I. Objectives:. Unit 1: Greetings Secton : A5,6,7,R.

(4) 1.Knowledge:- By the emnd of the lesson, Sts will be able to practice with “ How are you?” – “I’m fine” and to great each other and count numbers 6 – 10. *Grammar: Tobe, present simple tense, *Vocabulary: How are you, fine, thanks 2. Skills: listening, reading, writing 3. Behavior: II. Teaching aids: - Teacher .tape, pictures, cassettes, textbook. - Student: book, textbook, attention III. Steps of teaching: Teacher’s activities I. Warm up: (5’). Ss’activities - Listen to the T. - Play in two groups.. II. Presentation. (10’) 1. Pre teach vocab: Elicit from Sts. - fine (a): khoÎ - thank (v): c¸m ¬n - miss (n): c« (trÎ) - Mr (n): «ng - Mrs (n): bà, cô (có gia đình) * Check voacb: Slap the board. III. Practice (20’) * Rub out and remember dialogue. - T. gives instruction.  Ba Lan Ba:…, Lan. Lan:….…. Ba:… … you? Lan:… fine…. … …? Ba: …,thanks. *T. puts A5-P.12 on the board and crosses out some key words. * Make sure sts have to remember the rubbed out words and keep practising the dialogue. - Get sts to practise reading. - Ask sts to fill the missing words. * A6: - T. sets the scene: this is Miss Hoa, Mr Hung. They are talking each other.. - Listen and give the answers. - Listen and repeat then copy.. - Play in two groups.. Write on the board Jumbled words. - T. gives instruction. + w t o : two + e t e h r : three + i f e v : five + r o f u : four + e n o : one + h o : oh 1-Vocabs - fine (a): khoÎ - thank (v): c¸m ¬n - miss (n): c« (trÎ) - Mr (n): «ng - Mrs (n): bµ, c« (cã gia đình). A/5 listen and repeat * Pre-teach: Fine, thanks, Miss, Mr How are you?. - Listen to the T.. *Rub out & Remember dialogue A5 P12. - Practice reading. - Go to the board and fill the missing words. - Listen to the T.. *PRACTICE: A6 &A7 (P1213) +How are you? I’m fine, thanks.

(5) - T. models: Mr Hung: Hi, ( Miss Hoa) Miss Hoa: Hello, ( Mr Hung) Mr Hung: How are you? Miss Hoa: I’m fine, thanks. And you? Mr Hung: Fine, thanks. * Concept check: - Meaning. - Form: How are you? I’m (fine). Thanks. - Use: Hái th¨m søc khoÎ. - Pronunciation. * Get sts to practise. * A7: - Play the tape.( 2 times) - Get sts to write the information they’re listened themselves to complete the dialogue. - Check with the w.c. 4. Pre- teach number: Elicit from Sts. six eight ten seven nine. -Check vocab: Matching. * Practice: Dictation: - T. reads some telephone numbers: 8200294; 9504423; 720909; 7683045 - Get some sts to go to the board and write them. - Check with the w.c ( T. reads). * Word square: - T. gives instruction: Ask sts to find out the numbers learnt. F I V E G T O S N T. W O F. N. E I. G. H. T O E. O N X. O. E U V. T E N T H R. O E. N R E E X S. * Homework. (3’) - Learn the numbers: 0-10 by heart. - Practise asking and answering about the health. - Do ex : 3,4 ( P5) - Prepore the new leson. B1-3. - Listen to the T. and repeat.. - Listen and give the answers. then copy.. - Practice. - Listen to the T. - Individual writing and pair compare. - Give the answers. - Listen and give the answers. - Listen and repeat. - Individual matching. - Listen and write. - Go to the board and rewrite. - Listen and check. - Listen to the T. - Play in two groups.. *remember ( on page 13).

(6) * Self – evaluation: …………………………………………………………………………………………………… …………………………………………………………………………………………………… …………………………………………………………………………………………………… Week: 02 Period: 5 Date of planning : 01/08/2013 Date of teaching :. Unit1: Greetings Secton : B1,2,3,4,R. I. Objectives 1. Knowledge: By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to practice: Good morning/afternoon…” to greet each other, “ *Grammar: Tobe, present simple tense, *Vocabulary: Good morning / afternoon /evening 2. Skills: listening, reading, writing 3. Behavior: II. Teaching aids : - Teacher: tape, pictures, cassettes, textbook. - Student: book, textbook, attention III. Steps of teaching: Teacher’s activities I. Warm up: (5’) Chatting - Get some pairs to play the roles to greet each other and introduce. II. Presentation. (10’) 1. Pre teaach vocab: Elicit from Sts. - Good morning/ afternoon/ evening/ night : Xin chào. - Good bye: T¹m biÖt - Childen (n): những đứa trẻ. - eleven : 11 - twelve: 12 - thirteen: 13. - fourteen : 14 - fifteen : 15 * Check vocab: R. O. R. 2. Presentation dialogue :  B 3 (P.15) - T. gives instruction. a. Miss Hoa: - - , children. Children: - -, Miss Hoa. Miss Hoa : - are - ? Children : We’re - . Thank you. Miss Hoa: How - - ? Children: Fine, - . - -. b. Mom : - , Lan. Lan : Good night, Mom.. Ss’activities. Write on the board. - Pair work.. 1.vocabs: - Listen and give the answers.. - Listen and repeat then copy. - Go to the board and rewrite.. - Good morning/ afternoon/ evening/ night : - Good bye: T¹m biÖt - Childen (n): những đứa trÎ. - eleven : 11 - twelve: 12 - thirteen: 13. - fourteen : 14 - fifteen : 15. - Listen to the T. + Answer keys: a. Good morning/ good morning/ How/ you/ fine/ are you/thanks/ Good bye/ bye. b. Good night/.

(7) * Make an exchange: T – Wc,H – H, open pairs, close pairs. - Get some Sts to the board and fill in the missing words. + Check with the Wc. + Answer keys: a. Good morning, good morning, How, you,fine,are you, thanks, Good bye., bye. b. Good night, * Make an exchange: T – Wc, H – H, open/close pairs. - Get Sts to go to the board and fill in the missing words. * Concept checking:  + Meaning:  + Form: Good……… How are you? We’re…… + Use : Chµo vµ hái th¨m søc khoÎ. + Pronunciation: III. Practice : (20’) 1. Picture drill. - T . gives instruction. * T. modles: S1: Good (morning)! S2: Good (morning)! - Get Sts to play the roles.  2. Write : B4. - T. give instruction. - Get Sts to write the missing words in 3’ individually then pair compare. - Ask Sts to go to the board to fill the missing words. + Check with the Wc.  3. Picture drill: T. gives instruction. 7 + 8 / 10+2 /5+6 /7+5/ +8/3 +3 - T. modles : S1: Seven and eight ? S2: fifteen. - Make an exchange: T – Wc, H – H, open/ close pairs. IV. Production: (7’) Ordering vocab. - T . gives instruction. - T. reads and Sts listen to the T. and write numbers :from 0 to 15 in their notebooks then order the numbers. * Check with the Wc.. - Practice. - Go to the board and fill the missing words - Give the answers.. - Go to the board and fill the missing words - Give the answers and repeat then copy.. 2+ Form: - Good……… -How are you? -We’re……. - Listen to the T.. + Use : Chµo vµ hái th¨m søc khoÎ.. - Listen and repeat. - Play the roles. - Listen to the T. - Individual writing and pair compare. - Go to the board and fill in the missing words. - Listen to the T.. - Listen and repeat. - Practice.. - Listen to the T. - Individual work then pair c compare. - Give the answers..

(8) * Homework (3’) - Learn by heart the new words, the numbers. - Practice speaking E. with your friends. - Do ex. - Prepare the new lesson : C 1 – 4 . (P. 17-18) * Self – evaluation: …………………………………………………………………………………………………… …………………………………………………………………………………………………… …………………………………………………………………………………………………… Week: 02 Period: 6 Date of planning : 01/08/2013 Date of teaching :. Unit 1: Greetngs Secton : C1,2. I. Objectives: 1. Knowledge:- By the end of the lesson, Sts will be able to practice counting numbers from 1 to 20 and asking and answering with “ How old are you?” perfectly. 2. Skills: listening, reading, writing 3. Behavior: II. Teaching aids: - Teacher: textbooks, poster, a tape, a stereo. - Student: textbook, ……. III. Steps of teaching: Teacher’s activities I. Warm up: (5’) Chatting. II. Presentation. (10’) 1. Pre teach vocab: Elicit from sts. - sixteen : 16 - seventeen : 17 - eighteen : 18 - nineteen : 19 - twenty : 20 - How old……..? :….. bao nhiªu tuæi - This is …..: ®©y lµ….. * Check vocab: R. O. R III. Practice : (20’) a. Pelnamism. - T. gives instruction. Sixteen 16 seventeen 17 eighteen 18 nineteen 19 twenty 20 - Praise the winner. b. Slap the board: Elicit from Sts. - T. gives instruction. 5 20 16 17 11 15 9 18 6. Ss’activities - T – Wc. - Listen and give the answers. - Listen and repeat then copy.. -Go to the board to rewite the words individually. - Listen to the T. - Play in two groups. - Listen and give the answers. - Listen to the T. - Play in two groups.. Write on the board. 1-vocab: Elicit from sts. - sixteen : 16 - seventeen : 17 - eighteen : 18 - nineteen : 19 - twenty : 20 - How old……..? :….. bao nhiªu tuæi - This is …..: ®©y lµ…... Sixteen 16 seventeen 17 eighteen 18 nineteen 19 twenty 20 5 20 17 11 15 9. 16 18. 6.

(9) - Praise the winner. - Set the scene. - Play the tape ( 2 Ts) - Get Sts to practice reading.. - Write some numbers , listen to the T and shout : “Bingo” if win - Listen to the T. - Listen to the tape and repeat. - Practice reading. 2- model sentences The modles: - Listen and repeat in S1: How old are you ? chorus. S2: I’m ( twelve). + Form :How old + be+ S? - Listen and give the S + be+ number ( years answers then copy. old) - Use: Hái vµ tr¶ lêi vÒ tuæi. * The modles: S1: How old are you ? S2: I’m ( twelve). * Concept check: + Meaning: + Form : How old + be+ S? S + be+ number ( years old) - Use: Hái vµ tr¶ lêi vÒ tuæi. - Pronunciation. * Note: T. contrasts “ How old are you?”with “ How are you?” *Practise: Picture drill. - T. gives instruction: 12 20 18 11 19 13 15 - T. models: * S1: How old are you? * S2: I’m twelve years old. - Get sts to practise. - T. corrects if necessary. * Homework: -Learn the number 0- 20 by heart. - Practise speaking English with your friends. - Prepare the new lesson: C5-6 ( P.19). Week: 3 Period: 07 Date of planning:01/08/2013 Date of teaching:. - Listen to the T. - Run through. - Listen and repeat. - Practice.. Unit1: Greetings Section C 3,4,5*,R. I. Objectives 1. Knowledge: - By the end of the lesson,Ss will be able to use “How old are you?” to talk about age. * Grammar. Tobe, present simple tense, *Vocabulary.words related to scetion C3-6 2. Skills: listening, reading, writing 3. Behavior: II. Teaching aids : - Teacher .tape, pictures, catssets, textbook. - Student ., textbook III. Teaching steps Teacher’s activities * Warm up: (5’) - T. asks some questions and gets sts to. Ss’activities - Listen and answer.. Write on the board cards seventeen 19.

(10) answer. I. Presentation: (10’) 1.Pelnamism: - Listen to the answers. - T. gives instruction. - Play in two groups. Sixteen 16 seventeen 17 twenty Eighteen 18 nineteen 19 20 -Praise the winner. 2. Jumbled words. - Listen to the T. - T. gives instruction. - Group work. tgeih: eight neelve: eleven lewtev: twelve ntrenouef: fourteen ytwnet : twenty ientenne: nineteen - Give the answers. treniten : thirteen evens: seven. - Check with the wc. - Listen to the T. 3. Bingo: C5.( P19). - T – Wc. - T give instruction. _ Listen to the T. and - Get sts to listen to the teacher and say: give the answers. “Bingo”. - Listen and repeat. 4. Dictation and picture cue drill. - T. gives instruction and checks. - Run through. - T. models: S1: What’s your number? S2: [ oh- five- one- one, eight- two- six- Practice. six, nine- nine] 048214076 054845832 - Listen to the T. 0320 721 353 033612300 - Play in groups. 031720909 0511826699 * Make an exchange: T – Wc, H – H, open/close pairs. 5. Production: (7’) * Survey: T. gives instruction. Name Telephone number. 1. Hoa 033612300 2. 3. 4. - Listen and repeat. 5. - T. models: S1: What’s your name? S2: ( Hoa) . S1: What’s your telephone number? - Group work. S2: ( 033 612 300) - Some pairs say out. -T. gives limited times for sts to fill in the grids. - Check with the wc. *Consolidation - Vocabs of numbers * Homework: (3’) - Pracrise speaking English with your friends. - Do ex 1,2,3,4 (P 7,8,9,10) - Prepare the new lesson:Unit 2(A1-4). 16. nineteen. Eighteen. 17 twenty. 18. 20 Sixteen. poster treniten : ytwnet lewtev: tgeih neelve ntrenouef: ientenne: evens: S1: What’s your number? S2: [ oh- five- one- one, eighttwo- six- six, nine- nine]. S1: What’s your name? S2: ( Hoa) S1: What’s your telephone number? S2: ( 033 612 300).

(11) * Self – evaluation: …………………………………………………………………………………………………… …………………………………………………………………………………………………… ……………………………………………………………………………………………………. Week: 03 Unit 2: At school. Period: 08 Section: Come in A1,2,3*,R Date of planning: 01/08/2013 Date of teaching: I. Objectives: 1. Knowledge:By the end of the lesson, sts will be able to practise classroom imperatives to understand the teacher’s commands. *Grammar. Tobe, present simple tense, *Vocabulary.words related to scetion A1-4 2. Skills:listening, speaking, writing 3. Behavior: II. Teaching aids: - Teacher: E6 textbook, poster. Tape, stereo,… - Student: book…… III. Steps of teaching: Teacher’s activities Ss’activities Write on the board I. Warm up: (5’) Noughts and crosses. - Listen to the Poster -T. gives the instruction. instruction Now, you play in two teams one Play the game 1+5 9+6 3+2 student from each team choose the in two teams. 5+4 11+1 5+15 cell then count the number in it 3+5 7+7 2+8 other student has to read out the result.the team has the correct results which in a line first is the winner - Praise the winner. II. Presentation: (10’) - Listen and 1.vocabs: 1 Present vocabs: guess the Come in : (v) ®i vµo Elicit from Sts. meanings Sit down: (v) ngåi xuèng Come in :®i vµo ( mine) - Listen and Stand up : (v)đứng dậy Sit down >< standup ( mine) repeat then Open :(v) mở - Open > < close ( your book) copy. Close: (v) gÊp(s¸ch) * Check vocab: R. O. R - Go to te board and rewrite 2 Present the text (A1 -P.20) - Set the scene.(picture) Now, look at these pictures and tell Look at the me where they are, who this woman pictures, listen is, who these children are. to T and - Play the tape ( 2 Ts). answer the - Get Sts to listen and practice questions. reading. - Listen to the tape and repeat. III. Practice: (20’). - Practice. 2.Practice.

(12) 1 Matching A 2 ( P.21) - T. gives the instruction. Now, look at the pictures, read the imperative sentences then match the sentence with its correct picture - Get Sts to match the pictures with the imperative sentences individually then pair compare - Ask Sts to go to the board to match individually 2 Mime drill: - T. mimes: ( Open your book.) ( Stand up) ( Come in)…… 3. Simon says:(a3-p22) - T. get ss to play the game in 2 teams. Now, listen to me carefully ,If I say “Simon say :stand up” you quickly stand up, If I say “ Stand up” you keep sitting.. reading. - Read the imperative sentences, then match the pictures with the imperative sentences individually then pair compare - Listen to the T then do as teacher’s mime. -Match the pictures with the imperative sentences Answer key  Picture a-Open your book  Picture b-Sit down  Picture c-Come in  Picture d-Close your book  Picture e-Stand up. Listen to the instruction. Play the game in 2 teams. IV. Production: (7’) Listen to the 2 Mapped dialogue: * Mapped dialogue: dialogue then Miss Hoa children - T. gives instruction. fill in the … .morning ....morning,miss Miss Hoa children missing words Hoa. … .morning! ..morning,miss Hoa. - How……..? We’re….How…….? - How……..? - Fine,…….Sit… Yes, miss! We’re….How…….? -And open …… Yes, miss! - Fine,…….Sit… Yes, miss! - And open ……! Yes, miss! * Homework: (3’) - Learn by heart the vocabs. - Do ex. : 1, 2 (P.11) - Practice speaking E with your friends. - Prepare new lesson: B 1 -3. (P.23- 24) * Self – evaluation: …………………………………………………………………………………………………… …………………………………………………………………………………………………… ……………………………………………………………………………………………………. Week : 03 Unit 2 : AT SCHOOL ( Cont’) Period: 9 Section : Where do you live. B1, 2*,3 Date of planning : 01/08/2013 Date of teaching : I.Objectives. 1.Knowledge:By the end of the lesson, sts will be able to practise asking and answering : “Where do you live?” and question & answer to talk about the places. *Grammar. Tobe, present simple tense, *Vocabulary.words related to scetion B1-3.

(13) 2. Skills: listening, speaking, writing 3. Behavior: II. Teaching aids : - Teacher .tape, pictures, catssets, textbook. - Student ., textbook III. Teaching steps Teacher’s activities I. Warm up: (5’) * Simon says. ( T. gives instruction) Now, listen to me carefully ,If I say “Simon say :stand up” you quickly stand up, If I say “ Stand up” you keep sitting. II. Presentation. (10’) 1.Present vocab: Elicit from Sts. ( to) live (expl) ( in) a house ( realia) ( on/in) a street ( visual) ( in) a city ( visual) * Check vocab: Matching. 2. Present dialogue - Set the scene Now, look at this picture and tell me who this girl is,and who this boy is.What are they talking about? - Play the tape ( 2 times) - Get sts to practise speaking in chorus then individually. 3.Present structure T give model sentences ?What does the girl ask Nam when she wants to know nam’s house and how does Nam answers Checking concept. III.Practise: (20’) *Word cue drill. - T. gives instruction. Now, look at these phrases of places, listen to me and answer the question “where do you live” T. models first - T: Where do you live?. Ss’activities - Listen to the T. - St – Sts. Listen to the instruction. Play the game in 2 teams. - Listen and give the answers. - Listen and repeat then copy.. Write on the board. 1.Vocab: (to) live (v) : sèng ( in) a house(n) :(trong) mét ng«i nhµ ( on/in) a street(n) : đờng phè ( in) a city (n): thµnh phè. -Matching the word with its correct meaning. Listen to the situation. Listen to the dialogue. Practice speaking in chorus. Practice speaking individually. Listen and answer the question. “where do you live” “ I live on Tran Phu Street” Listen and read the model Copy.. Listen to the instruction. Listen to the model T- wc, S- S, open pairs, close pairs.. 2. Model sentences -Where do you live? - I live on Tran Phu treet. in a house. in a city in Hue …………….. Use: Dùng để hỏi và trả lời về nơi ai đó đang sống. 3-Practice. (wordsheet) 1. a city 2 Ho Chi Minh city. 3. a house 4. Le Loi street 5. Ha Noi 6. Hung Vuong street.

(14) ( holding the phrase “in a city.” - S: I live in a city. *Make an exchange: T- wc, S- S, open pairs, close pairs. *Sing the alphabet song (B3-P24) T uses the song to present the English alphabet III. Production:(7’) 1.Find someone who - T. give instruction. Each student asks and fill information about three others. -T. models: What’s the question for name? What’s the question for age? What’s the question for street? What’s the question for city? -Get sts to take turns to ask each other and fill in the table.. 7. Tran Phu street. - S1: Where do you live? - S2: I live in a city Listen and repeat.. Name age village Hoa 12 Nam Thai … … … Listen to the instruction. Listen to T’ model Go around class and ask friends to fill in the table.. Ex: Nam. What your name? Hoa. My name is Hoa. Nam. How old are you? Hoa. I’m 12 years old. Nam. Where do you live? Hoa. I live in Namthai.. *Consolidation - Hỏi và trả lời về nơi ai đó đang sống. * Homework: (3’) -Use the survey to write a short dialogue about three friends. -Practise speaking Engkish with your friends. - Do Ex:1,2,3,4(p12,13) -Prepare the new lesson: B4-6 * Self – evaluation: …………………………………………………………………………………………………… …………………………………………………………………………………………………… …………………………………………………………………………………………………… Week : 04 Unit 2 : AT SCHOOL Cont’) Period : 10 Section : B 4, 5, R Date of planning : 01/08/2013 Date of teaching : I. Objectives: 1.Knowledge: By the end of the lesson, Sts will be able to practice spelling their names and practice asking and answering and writing about personal, alphabet and numbers. * Grammar. Tobe, present simple tense, *Vocabulary.words related to scetion B4-6 2. Skills: listening, speaking, writing 3. Behavior:.

(15) II. Teaching aids : - Teacher .tape, pictures, catssets, textbook. - Student ., textbook III. Teaching steps: Teacher’s activities. Ss’activities. Write on the board. I-Warm up: (5’) Gets students to sing the song of ABC. Sing the song of ABC. II- Presentation. (10’). Listen Repeat Go to the board and rewrite Copy. 1-Present vocabs: Mime. Vietnamese Vietnamese Checking vocabs: ROR. 1-Vocabs: (to) Spell (v) đánh vần How : như thế nào It : nó. Look at the picture andlisten to the situation. 2- Present dialogue-B4P25 Set the scene. Now look at this picture, this is Lan and this is Lan’ Teacher. Her teacher is asking some information about her T plays the tape (2 times). Get ss to listen and repeat Get ss to pracise the dialogue in pairs. Listen to the conversation and repeat in chorus Practice the dialogue in pairs. Listen and repeat Read the missing dialogue in chorus then in pairs. 3- Present structure: Rub out and remember dialogue: T writes the dialogue on the board. Reads and get ss to repeat, then T step by step rubs the words in the dialogue until none word left Get ss to read the missing dialogue in chorus then in pairs III. Practice: (20’) 1. Word cue drill: T gives instruction. Now, I have some people’s names, imagine they are. 2- New structure (Rub out and remember dialogue: ) T: What’s your name? St: My name is Lan. T: How do you spell it? St: L – A – N , Lan.. Tuan Hai Listen.. Thao Phuong.

(16) your names answer the questions * T. modles: S1: What’s your name? S2: My name is ( Tuan). S1: How do you spell it/ (your name)? S2: T – U- A – N, Tuan. * Make an exchange : T – Wc, open / close pairs. III-Production: B5-P25 Now,write the answer in your books.. Answer T’s questions. Practise asking and answering the questions using the given names. Write the answers for the questions. Hien. Questions: 1-What is your name? 2- How old are you? 3-Where do you live? 4-How do you spell your name?. *Consolidation: - The alphabet - Spelling name * Homework. - Practice speaking E . with your friends - Do ex.5,6(p13)- Prepare the new lesson : C 1 (p.26-28) * Self – evaluation: …………………………………………………………………………………………………… …………………………………………………………………………………………………… …………………………………………………………………………………………………… Week : 04 Unit 2( Cont’d )+ Test 15 mins Period : 11 Section : : C 1 Date of planning : 01/08/2013 Date of teaching : I. Objectives: 1.Knowledge: By the end of the lesson, Sts will be able to practice with : This / That positive statements and Yes – No questions to talk about people and things at school. *Grammar. This, that, yes, no *Vocabulary, words related to section c1 2. Skills: listening, speaking 3. Behavior: II. Teaching aids : - Teacher .tape, pictures, cassette, textbook. - Student ., textbook III. Teaching steps: Teacher’s activities I. Warm up: (5’)  Jumbled words. - T. gives instruction. 1. evening. 2. street. 3. hello. 4. city. 5. name.. Ss’activities. - Listen to the T. - Play in two groups.. Write on the board 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7.. v e e i g n n e t e r t s l l e h o y i c t m n e a t e e t h i r n n t s a t dpu.

(17) 6. thirteen. 7. stand up.  * Check with the Wc. II. Presentation. (10’)  1. Present vocab: Elicit from Sts. Points at a student. Now, I am a teacher. This is our school. This is our class. Points at a desk. Points at the nearest desk. “this is a desk” Points at the farthest desk. “that is a desk” * Check vocab: Matching. Now go to the board and match the word with its meaning. * Check with the wc.  Word Cue Drill: Practice vocabulary and revise “How do you spell it? Now, look at this word and answer my questions. ?What’s this in English ? ? How do you spell it?.  2.Present dialogues. - Set the scene: T. gives the picture: T. asks: Who’ s this? What’ s this? - Play the tape. ( 2 Ts). - Get Sts to practice reading.  3. Model sentences: Elicit the modle sentence from Sts. - This is my desk. - That is my school. - Is this your class? - Is that you teacher? Yes, it is./ No, it isn’t. III- Practice :(20’)  a. Picture drill: C1 (P.26-27). - T. gives instruction. Now, I have some pictures, you sit in pairs and practice asking and answering * T. modles: S1: Is this your ( school) ? S2: No, it isn’t. - Get Sts to practice in pairs. -Calls some pairs to perform. - Listen and guess the meanings - Listen and repeat then copy.. 1-vocab - a student: häc sinh, sinh viªn ( realia) - a teacher: gi¸o viªn - a school: trêng häc - a class: líp ( häc). - a desk - this: c¸i nµy, nµy. - that: c¸i kia, kia. - Go to the board and match. Listen and answer the questions -[a student] -[s-t-u-d-e-n-t] - Listen to the model then do the same with the others. S. anwsers: -It s a student/ a teacher. -It s a desk/a school....... -Listen to the coversation -Practice reading Listen and repeat. - Listen to the T. - Pair work. -Perform in pairs. (Poster) S1:What’s this in English? S2: [a student] S1: How do you spell it? S2: [s-t-u-d-e-n-t] A desk A school A student A class (Tape + stereo) 2-Model sentences: - This is my desk. - That is my school. - Is this your class? - Is that you teacher Yes, it is./ No, it isn’t. (Pictures). S1: Is this your( school)? S2: No, it isn’t..

(18) * Check with the Wc.  b. Realia drill: - T. points at real things in and around the classroom and asks and gets Ss to give the answers. * Eg: T. Is this your desk? St: No, it isn’t./ Yes, it is. - Get Sts to free practice in pairs.. - Listen and answer T’s question. -practice in pairs.. Test 15 munites Name:…………………………………… Mark. Teacher’s remarks. Câu 1: Choose the best answer to complete the sentenses: 1- …… is your name? A- Where. B- What. C- How. 2- She ……. a teacher. A- is. B- are. C- am. 3- ……… do you live? A- Where. B- What. C- How. 4- My …….. is a doctor. He is forty. A- sister. B- mother. C- father. 5- How …….. are you? A- old. B- spell. C- do. Câu 2: Answer these questions about yourself. 1- What’s your name? …………………………………………. 2- How old are you? …………………………………………. *Consolidation. - Using “this/that” - Vocabulary in/around the class. * Homework: (3’) - Learn by heart the new words. - Do ex. 2 (P.15) - Practice speaking E. with your friends - Prepare the new lesson : C 2- 4 (P.28 – 29) * Self – evaluation: …………………………………………………………………………………………………… ……………………………………………………………………………………………………..

(19) …………………………………………………………………………………………………… Week : 04 Unit2 : AT SCHOOL. ( Cont’d) Period : 12 Section:C 2,3,R Date of planning : 01/08/2013 Date of teaching : I. Objectives: 1.Knowledge:By the end of the lesson, Sts will be able to practice asking, answering about the names of things. *Grammar. This, that,yes,no *Vocabulary.words related to scetion c2-r 2. Skills: listening, speaking 3. Behavior: II. Teaching aids : - Teacher .tape, pictures, catssets, textbook. - Student ., textbook III. Teaching steps: Teacher’s activities I. Warm up: (5’) - Get some pairs of the Sts to practice asking and answering Use : Yes – No question in pairs.. II. Presentation. (10’)  1.Present vocabs.: Elicit from Sts. - a door: cöa chÝnh - a window: cöa sæ - a board: c¸i b¶ng - a clock: đồng hồ treo tờng (realia/ - a wastebasket: giá r¸c pictures) - a school bag: cÆp häc sinh. - a pencil: c¸i bót ch× - a pen: c¸i bót mùc - a ruler: c¸i thíc - an eraser: cục tẩy, cục gơm * Check vocab: Matching. - Get Sts to go to the board to match individually.  2. Model sentences. (Teacher holds a pen and asks) ? What is this ? (Teacher points at the door and asks) ? What is that? Now look at the model and give me the form. Checking concept. III-Practice. (20’). Ss’activities. Write on the board. - Pair work. Asking and answering using the structure: Is this/that….? Look at the pictures/real things and give the meanings. Listen Repeat Copy. 1.Vocabulary. - a door: cöa chÝnh - a window: cöa sæ - a board: c¸i b¶ng - a clock: đồng hồ treo tờng - a wastebasket: giá r¸c - a school bag: cÆp häc sinh. - a pencil: c¸i bót ch× - a pen: c¸i bót mùc - a ruler: c¸i thíc - an eraser: cục tÈy. Go to the board to match the word with its picture. Answer the question. ( it is a pen) (it is a door) Find out the form Copy.. 2. Model sentences. What is this ? it is a pen What is that? it is a door  Form: WHAT IS THIS?(hái vËt ë gÇn) THAT?(hái vËt ë xa) IT IS + A/AN + N(danh tõ đém đợc số ít) Pictures..

(20)  1. Picture drill : C 2 (P.28) Gets Ss to look at the pictures and answer the questions using the structure above. T asks-Ssanswer Ss ask-T answers Ss ask- Ss answer. - Listen and give the answers. -Look at the pictures and make the questions G1 ask-G2 answer G2 ask-G1 answer. IV- Further practice. (7’) 1. Now, you sit in pairs, asking and - Sit in pairs, answering about things around you. asking and 2. Noughts and crosses: answering things T. gives instruction. around the class. Now, you play in 2 groups, a student - Listen to the from each group chooses the word and instruction make question “How do you spell this - Play in two word?” groups. Then a student from his/her group must spell that word correctly and his/her group gets one point The group has 3 points in a line is the winner *Consolidation: - What is this/that? and the answer - Classroom vocabulary. * Homework : ( 3’) - Learn by heart the new words. - Do ex. 1, 3 (P.14) - Practice speaking English with your friends. - Prepare the new lesson: Unit 3 : A 1, 2. desk clock pencil. ruler door classroom pen schoolbag book. * Self – evaluation: …………………………………………………………………………………………………… …………………………………………………………………………………………………… …………………………………………………………………………………………………… Week: 5 Period :13 Date of planning: 01/09/2013 Date of teaching: Unit 3: At home Section: A 1-2 I. Objectives: 1. Knowledge: By the end of the lesson, sts will be able to practise asking and answering with “Wh” questions with “this, that, these, those” and living room vocab to talk about things in the house. * Grammar. Tobe, present simple tense, * Vocabulary.words related to scetion A1- 2 2. Skill: listening, speaking, reading. 3. Behavior: II. Teaching aids : teacher .tape, pictures, catssets, textbook..

(21) Student ., textbook III. Steps of teaching: Teacher’s activities I. Warm up: (5’)  Brainstorm. Now, play in two groups, go to the board and list the classroom vocabulary.. II. Presentation: (10’)  1. Pre-teach vocab: Elicit from Sts. - a house ( pictures) - a living room ( pictures) - a telephone ( pictures) - a lamp (realia) - a bookshelf ( pictures) - an armchair ( pictures) - a table (realia) - a chair(realia) - a stereo ( pictures) * Check vocab: Slap the board: Elicit them from the Sts. - T. gives instruction. - Ask Sts to go to the board to slap the board in two groups. -Praise the winner.. Ss’activities Play in two groups. Go to the board and list the classroom vocabulary. Write on the board classroom vocabulary. A pen. G1 G2 1. Vocabulary. - a house :(n) ng«i nhµ - a living room: (n) phßng kh¸ch - a telephone:(n) ®iÖn tho¹i - a lamp: (n) bóng đèn - a bookshelf: (n) kÖ s¸ch - an armchair (n) ghÕ bµnh Look at the pictures/ - a table :(n) c¸i bµn real things and give - a chair:(n) c¸i ghÕ - a stereo the meanings. kÖ Listen s¸c c¸i ®iÖn h Repeat ghÕ tho¹i Copy bãng đèn. ng« i nhµ. phßng kh¸ch. Go to the board play 2.Model sentences in two groups *What are these/ those?  2. Presentation text: A2 They’re tables/ chairs. - Get sts to repeat “Wh” questions with “this, that…” about the names of => chóng ta dïng “these” thay things. cho “this” / “those” thay cho * What’s this/ that? “that” / “are” thay cho “is”/ “they” thay cho “it”khi danh tõ It’s a table/ chair. ë d¹ng sè nhiÒu.(®a sè cã “s” ë *What are these/ those? Listen and repeat ®u«i) They’re tables/ chairs. Sit in pairs , asking * Note: a/an đứng trớc danh từ => chóng ta dïng “these” thay cho đếm đợc số ít and answering. “this” / “those” thay cho “that” / a-> an ( before u,e,o,a,i) “are” thay cho “is”/ “they” thay cho “it” khi danh tõ ë d¹ng sè nhiÒu.(®a sè cã “s” ë ®u«i) * Note: a-> an ( before u,e,o,a,i) III- Practice: (20’)  *Picture drill. Pictures - T. asks sts to use the pictures in A2.

(22) (P. 31) to practise asking and answering. - Listen and give the - T, models: answers. S1: What is this? S2: It’s a pen. S1: What are these? - Pair working. S2: They are pens. Now, sit in pairs, asking and answering about things in the picture * Production: (7’) - T asks Ss to read a1 - Correct and give marks - What are these/those They are…………. * Homework: (3’) - Learn by heart the new words. - Practice asking and answeringwith “Wh-Qs” with your friends. - Do ex. 1,2 (p.17, 18) - Prepare the new lesson : A3,4, R * Self – evaluation: …………………………………………………………………………………………………… …………………………………………………………………………………………………… …………………………………………………………………………………………………… Week: 5 Period 14 Date of planning: 01/09/2013 Date of teaching: Unit 3 : At home. Section : A 3, 4, R I. Objectives: 1. Knowledge: By the end of the lesson , Sts will be able to practice speaking English about family members. * Grammar. Tobe, present simple tense, *Vocabulary.words related to scetion B4-6 2. Skills: listening, speaking, reading. 3. Behavior:. II. Teaching aids: - Teacher: E.6 textbook, a tape, a stereo. Pictures. III. Steps of teaching: Teacher’s activities I-Warm up: (5’)  Noughts and crosses. Now, you play the game in two teams, choose the number then make the question and answer it. the team has the correct results which in a line first is the winner + T. modles: S1: What is this? S2: It is a TV.. Ss’activities - Listen to T. - Play in two teams.. Write on the board A table A couch A chair. A bookshelf A telephone An armchair. A lamp A television A stereo.

(23) - Praise the winner. II. Presentation: (20’)  1. Pre teach vocab: Elicit from sts. - my - his - her - your. family/father mother brother/sister. * Check vocab: R.O.R  2. A3: Set the scene. A. Pre reading: * T / F statement prediction. - T. gives instruction. 1- Ba is twelve years old and he is a student. 2- Mr.Ha is a teacher. 3- Ba’s mother is Ngoc and she’s a worker 4- Ba’s sister , Lan is a teacher. 5- There ar 5 people in BA’s family. + Collect Sts’ ideas. B. While reading: * Check prediction: - Ask Sts to read the text and check with your prediction ( correct the wrong sentences) individually then pair compare. - Get feed back from the Sts Pre-speaking A4 * Dialogue built : T. gives instruction. - Ask Sts to practice reading then go to the board and fill in the missing words. S1: - …………. that? S2: It’s …………….. S1: -…………….her……………..? S2 : …………………..Nga. * Get Sts to play the roles and practice the dialogue Practice : (10’) 1. Word cue drill : T. gives instruction. + Mrs. Nga / 35 + Mrs. Ha / 40 + Lan / 15 + Mr. Tan / 55 + Nam / 17 * Make an exchange: T- Wc, H-H,. - Lisen and give the answers. - Listen and repeat then copy. - Go to the board and rewrite the words.. 321- vocabs: - my family/father - his mother brother/sister - her - your. . * T / F statement 1- Ba is twelve years old and he - Listen to the T. is a student.(T) - Predict 2- Mr.Ha is a teacher.(T) individually then 3- Ba’s mother is Ngoc and pair compare. she’s a worker(F) 4- Ba’s sister , Lan is a teacher. (F) 5- There ar 5 people in BA’s family.(F) - Read the text and check their prediction. - Give the answers. Dialogue built Listen and read the dialogue S1: …………. …….that? Practice the S2: It’s …………….. dialogue in pairs S1: ……….her………? S2 : …………………..Nga.. Example exchange Asking and answering using the given information. S1- Who is that? S2-That’s hismother/father/… S1-What’s his/her name? S2-His/Her name’s Nga/Ha….

(24) open/close pairs. IV- Production: (7’) Describe and Draw. Get ss to draw their families then sit in pairs asking and answering with the information. Describe and Draw. sit in pairs asking and answering with the information. Ex: Tam/55 S1-Who’s this? S2-it’s my mother. S1-What’s her name? S2-Her name’s Tam S1-How old is she? S2-She is 55 years old. * Home work: (3’) - Describe about your family. - Learn by heart the new words. - Prepare B1-2. - Do ex. 3,4 (P.20-21). - Prepare the new lesson : B1,2(P.35-36) * Self – evaluation: …………………………………………………………………………………………………… …………………………………………………………………………………………………… Week: 5 Period 15 Date of planning: 01/09/2013 Date of teaching: Unit 3 : At home Section : B1 , 2 (P.35-36) I. Objectives: 1. Knowledge: By the end of the lesson. Sts wil be able to practice counting numbers from 21 to 100 and pronunciation of plural nouns ( s/ iz/z) perfectly. * Grammar. How many ……are there? *Vocabulary, words related to section B1-2 2. Skills: listening, speaking, reading, writing. 3.Behavior: II. Teaching aids: - Teacher: English 6 textbook, poster, picturre 7,8 - Students: textbook………. III. Steps of teaching: Teacher’s activities I. Warm up: (5’)  Broard drill. - T. gives instruction. Now listen and answer the questions by telling the alphabet T points at the number and asks. + T. asks: What is number 9? -“A” + The alphabets: II. Presentation (10’). Ss’activities - Listen to the T.. Write on the board 1a -2b-3c-4f-5g-6u-7o-8y-9p-10e11r-12w-13q-14z-15x-16v-17m18n-19d-20s-21c-22g-23l-24j-25t. - Listen and answer Individually. 1-vocabulary.

(25)  1. Pre teach vocab: Elicit from Sts. - thrity/ thirty-one…….. - forty/forty-one…………. - fifty/ thirty- one……….. - sixty/sixty-one………… - seventy/seventy-one……. - eighty/eighty-one……….. - ninetyninety-one………… - one hundred One hundred and one: ……………………. - a bench(n): ghÕ dµi -benches.(sè nhiÒu * Check vocab: What and where. - Elicit the numbers from Sts.. - Listen and give the answers. - Listen and repeat then copy.. Listen, read then go to the board and rewrite. - thrity/ thirty-one…….. - forty/forty-one…………. - fifty/ thirty- one……….. - sixty/sixty-one………… - seventy/seventy-one……. - eighty/eighty-one……….. - ninetyninety-one………… - one hundred One hundred and one: ……………………. - a bench(n): ghÕ dµi -benches.(sè nhiÒu) 51. 32. 43 10 0. 65. 77. 80. - Praise the winner. - Listen and give the answers. - Go to the board and play in two groups.. III. Practice: (20’) a. Snake and Ladders. - T. gives instruction. b. Realia drill. - T. gives instruction. Gets ss to look carefully things around class then telling them - T. modles: S1: There is (one ) door. S2: And there are (five) desks. …………………….. IV. Production: (7’) 2. a. Dictation lists: - T. gives instruction: Get Sts to listen to the T. and write the pronunciation into three groups: /s/ iz/ z/ + T. reads: Desks, rulers, benches, students, tables, books, clocks, couches, doors, windows, houses, lamps. + Check with the Wc. + Notes: How to add and read “s”. * Home work: (3’). Look carefully things around class then telling them. S1: There is (one ) door. S2: And there are (five) desks. ……………………... /s/ desks - Listen to the T. - Listen and write “s” into 3 columns: /s/,/z/,/iz/then go to the board to write.. /iz/ benches. /z/ rulers. students couches tables books houses doors clocks windows lamps.

(26) - Learn by heart the count numbers 21-100 and how to add and read “s” - Do ex.: 1,2(P.21) - Prepare the new lesson: B3, 4, 5, R * Self – evaluation: …………………………………………………………………………………………………… …………………………………………………………………………………………………… Week: 06 Unit 3 : AT HOME Period: 16 Section : BB 3, 4, 5, R Date of planning: 06/09/2013 Date of teaching: I. Objectives: 1.Knowledge: By the end of the lesson, Sts will be able to practice with “How many… …are there…?” questions and answer . - Futher practice in numbers to talk about things in the classroom, the livingroom and the family. . *Grammar how many…….? / there are…… *Vocabulary.words related to section B3-r 2.Skills: Listening, speaking, reading 3. Behavior: Some weaker Sts may get difficulty in grammar. II.Teaching aids : - Teacher .tape, pictures, cassettes, textbook. - Student ., textbook III. Steps of teaching: Teacher’s activities I-Warm up: (5’) 1. Chain game: - T. gives instruction. Now, work in group of 4, use the information you have filled in B2 page 36 to describe your classroom - T. modles: S1: There is one door. S2: There is one door and one window S3: ……… II. Presentation: (10’) 2. 1-Presentation textB3: - Gets Sts to listen to the dialogue and repeat. - Plays the tape (2 Ts). - Get Sts to practice reading. 3.. 2- Modle sentences:. Ss’activities - Listen to the instruction - work in group of 4, use “there is/are………..” to describe the classroom. - Listen to T. - Listen to the dialogue and repeat. - Practice reading. - Listen and give the answers. - Listen and repeat then copy.. Write on the board Ex: S1-there is one door. S2-there is one door and one window S3-there is…………. 1- Modle sentences: -How many doors are there? desks benches - There is one./ There are two..

(27) Elicit from Sts. -How many doors are there? desks benches - There is one./ There are two. III. Practice (20’) 4. Picture drill : B 2 (P 36 ); B 5 (P.37) - T. gives instruction. Now look at the pictures then ask and answer the questions using the model above + T. modles: S1: How many desks are there? S2: There are six. - Get Sts to look at the pictures (P.36) to practice asking and answering , use “ How many…….?”. 2-Practice Example: - Listen to T.. S1: How many desks are there? S2: There are six.. - Listen and repeat.. - Pairwork.(look at the pictures then ask and answer the questions). IV-Production: (7’) * Survey: * survey - T. gives instruction. Lan: How many people are there in your family? Now ask your friends to Nam: Three get some information Lan: How many chairs are there in your house? about his/her family Nam: Two + T.models: In your In your In your house? S1: How many people family? classroom? are there in your family? Name People Chairs Lamps Tables Tvs Desks Windows S2: / Three./ Nam 3 2 S1: How many armchairs are there in your house? S2; / Two/. - Get Sts to practice in groups( write the information Into the grids.) *Homework. (3’) - Practice speaking E. with your partner. - Do ex. 3,4 (P.22) - Prepare the new lesson : C 1, 2, R (P.38-39) * Self – evaluation: …………………………………………………………………………………………………… …………………………………………………………………………………………………… …………………………………………………………………………………………………….

(28) Week : 06 Unit 3 : AT HOME Period 17 Section: C1,2, R Date of planning: 06/09/2013 Date of teaching: I. Objectives: 1.Knowledge: By the end of the lesson, Sts will be able to practice reading a text and understand the details and talk about jobs. * Grammar: how many…….? / there are…… * Vocabulary: words related to section c1-r 2.Skills: listening, reading, writing 3. Behavior: II. Teaching aids : - Teacher .tape, pictures, cassetes, textbook. - Student ., textbook III. Steps of teaching: Teacher’s activities I. Warm up: (5’) *Write it up - Ask Sts to go to the board and write 5 sentences (from survey). + Eg: There are three people in Nam’s family.. Ss’activities - Two Sts go to the board and write.. II. Pre reading: (10’) 1.Pre teach vocab: Elicit from Sts. - an engineer: kü s (translation) - a doctor: b¸c sÜ (explanation/picture) - a nurse: y t¸(explanation/picture). - Listen and give the answers - Listen and repeat then copy.. * Check vocab : R.O.R 2. Networks:. T. gives instruction. Now,play in 2teams, go to the board and write the vocabs of “job” the team which has more correct words is the winner. 3 . Open prediction: Set the sence(Picture) Now, look at this picture! This is Lan and her family, now you work in 4 groups to predict some information about her family.. - Go to the board and rewrite. - Listen to the T. - Play in two groups.. - Listen to the T. -Work in 4 groups to predict the information about. Write on the board. 1- Vocabulary. -an engineer:(n) kü s - a doctor: (n) b¸c sÜ - a nurse:(n) y t¸ -What does he/she do? (bµ/«ng Êy lµm nghÒ g×?) Ex: S1. What does your father do? S2.He is a teacher. jobs. Student Team1 Team2 Lan’s family Members How What old….? does he /shedo? Father Mother Brother Lan..

(29) - Collect sts’ ideas. II. While reading: (20’) Now open your books page 38 then read the text and check your prediction! Correct the false information. + Check with the Wc.. Lan’s family Read the text and check the prediction - Give the answers. - Read and check their prediction. - Give the answers. - Listen to the T.. *Comprehension questions Noughts and crosses. - T. gives instruction. Now work in 2 teams, read the text again then disccuss to find out the answers for the questions on page 38 + Praise the winner.. III. Post reading. (7’) 1. Word cue- picture drill: C 2 - P. 39 - T. gives instruction: - Get Sts to talk about Song’s family. + T. modles: * Make an exchange : T – Wc, H – H, open/close pairs - Get Sts to write some sentences about Song’s family. + Ex: _ Song is a student and he is twele.There are four…. - This is mr Kien, He’s a doctor. He’s 42 years old….. -Groupwoking - Play in two teams.. - Listen to the T. Asking and answering in pairs. * Answer keys: + Father: forty an enginee + Mother : thirty-five /a teacher + Brother: eight /a student + Lan: twelve / a student. 2- Comprehension questions.. a g c h b e i f d 5. * Answer keys: a-There are 4 b-He is 40 c-He is an engineer. d-She is 35 e-She is a teacher f-He is 8 g-He is a student h- They are in their livingroom i-(How many telephones are there in Lan’s livingroom? -There is one. Ex: S1: How many people are there in Song’s family? S2: There are four. S1: Who is this? S2: It is Mr. Kien. S1: …….. Write it up. * Homework: (3’) - Learn by heart the new words. - Write a passage about your family. - Do ex.1, 2, 3 (P.23-25) - Prepare the new lesson : Grammar practice. * Self – evaluation: …………………………………………………………………………………………………………… …………………………………………………………………………………………………………… ……………………………………………………………………………………………………………. Week: 06.

(30) Period 18 Unit 3:(Cont’d) Date of planning: 06/09/2013 Section:Grammar practice Date of teaching: I. Objectives: 1.Knowledge: By the end of the lesson, Sts will be able to further practice in :”Be”, imperative, numbers, question words, there is/are, and furniture vocab. * Grammar . review * Vocabulary.words related to the grammar practice 2.Skills: listening, reading, writing 3. Behavior: II. Teaching aids: - Teacher: textbook,…….. - Students: textbook……… III. Steps of teaching: Teacher’s activities I. Warm up: (5’) Chatting. II. Presentation. (30’) 1. “ Be” * Gap fill: Grammar practice 1,2,3 (p.40) - Get Sts to do exercises individually then pair compare. * Noughts and crosses. - T. gives instruction. - Praise the winner.. Ss’activities. Write on the board. - T – Wc. 1- Gap fill Answer key: - One Sts repeat Ex1:am/am/are/is/are how to use of “ to Ex2:am/is/is/are/are be” Ex3:a-are/am - Individual work b:is/is then pair compare. c:is/is not d:are/are not - Listen to the T. They/ We/Sts - Play in two teams. teacher He/an I/a student. engineer You/12 We/brothers. She/ a nurse They / sisters She/a doctor. 2. Imperatives: Grammar practice 4 (P.40) - Get Sts to play the roles : “Simon say”. - Listen to the T. Do as teacher says. 3. Question words. a. Gap fill: Grammar practice 6 (P.41) - Give a poster 6 (p.41) on the board and give the instruction. - Get Sts to fill in the missing words individually then pair compare then go to the board to fill in the table. - Check with the wc. b. Answer given: + Gives the instruction: - Get Sts to look at the answers. Answers key:Ex:6 a-what/is - Work individually b-where/live then pair compar, c-what/is after that go to the d-where/is b. to fill the missing words. 2-Answers given: Song is a St and he is twelve . There are 4 people in Song’s family: his father, his mother, his.

(31) given and then make the questions. *Check with the Wc. + Get Sts to make the questions for the answers above. - Check with the wc. 1. How old is Song? 2.How many people are there in Song’s family? 3. What is his father’s name? 4. How old is Song’s father? 5. What does his father/he do? 6. What is his mother’s name? 7. How old is she? 8. What does his mother do? 9 .What is his sister’s name? 10. What does he do? 4. Numbers : Bingo. - T. gives instruction: Ask Sts to choose 5 numbers from 11 to 19 and the decimals 20, 30, …. 100. - T. reads: seventeen, seventy, forty, twelve, one hundred, thirty, sixteen, eleven, thirteen, fifty, eighty, ninety, eighteen, fourteen, twenty, fifteen, sixteen, nineteen. 5. Furniture: - Get Sts to do ex. 10 on page 43 individually. * Crossword puzzle. - T. gives instruction - Get Sts to play the game in groups. S2: No, it isn’t. * T/ F repetition drill ( Picture B5 – P. 37) - T. gives instruction : If it is true, Sts repeat. If it is not true, Sts silent. *T. reads: 1. There is a TV. 2.There are three stools. 3. There are four people. 4. There are 2 armchairs and 2 chairs. 5. There are 7 books. 6. There are 2 lamps. 7. There is one lamp. 8. There is a stereo and a telephone.. - Listen to the T. - Pair work. - Give the answers.. sister and him. His father’s name is Kien. He is forty and he is a doctor. His mother’s name is Oanh. She is thirty nine years old and she is a nurse. His sister’s name is Lan. She is fifteen and she is a student. + Answer keys:. - Pair work. - Give the answers.. - Listen to the T. -Take 5 numbers - Listen and shout “ Bingo” if win.. - Listen to the T.and do ex. - Listen to the T. - Group work. - T – Wc. - Work individually. - Listen to the T. - Listen and repeat or silent. + repeat + silent + repeat. + repeat. + silent + silent + repeat. + repeat.. Answers key:Ex 10/43 c h a i r. 1. 12 2. 4 3. Kien 4. 42 5. a doctor. 6. Oanh 7 . 39 8. a nurse 9 . Lan 10. a student.

(32) e. w. r. b. o. a. i. n. d. L A S S R O O m. s. e c. d. R U L E R. d o. c. B O O k. o. r. w. *Homework:(3’) - Revise what they have learnt to make the coming test * Self – evaluation: …………………………………………………………………………………………………………… …………………………………………………………………………………………………………… ……………………………………………………………………………………………………………. Week: 07 Period 19 Date of planning: 20/09/2013 Date of teaching:. The first written test ( Time: 45’). I. Objectives: - Check the knowledge which has been learnt to know how well Sts know about the grammar, vocab, structures, understanding, …. - Sts do the test carefully, exactly,and clearly. II. New lesson. - Hand out the photocopies. - Ask Sts to master the test. I. LISTENING: Listen to the passage and tick T (True) or F (False) to the following statements. (2.5 pts). T F 1. There are 6 people in Minh’s family. 2. Minh’s father is a teacher. 3. He is 45 years old. 4. Minh’s mother is a nurse. 5. She is 43 years old. II. READING: Read the passage and circle the best option (A, B, C or D) to complete the sentences. (2.5 pts) There are four people in Minh's family, his parents, his sister and him. Minh’s father is an engineer. Everyday he goes to work at 7 o’clock. Minh’s mother is a doctor. She works in a hospital in the town. She goes to work at 6.30. Minh’s sister is a student at Hanoi National University. She is twenty years old. Minh is twelve. He is a student at Thai Thuy School. 1. There are __________ people in Minh’s family. A. three B. four C. five D.six 2. His father is a(n) __________. A. worker B. driver C. engineer D.teacher 3. His mother goes to work at __________. A. 6.30 B. 6.45 C. 6.50 D.6.00 4. Minh’s sister is __________ years old. A. 12 B. 20 C. 22 D.21 5. Minh studies at __________. A. Tran Phu School B. Le Duan School C. Quang Trung D.Thai Thuy school School.

(33) III. LANGUAGE FOCUS:Match one question in column A with an appropriate answer in column B. (2.5 pts) A B Matching 1. What is your name? A. He’s forty. 12. How old are you? B. My name is Long. 23. Where do you live? C. There are fifty students. 34. What’s your father’s name? D. I am twelve. 45. How old is he? E. I’m fine, thanks 56. Where does he work? F.It’ my pen 67. How many students are there in your class? G. I live in Bac Thai 78.How are you? H. He works in Thai Thuy. 89.What’s that? I. They are pencils 910.What are they? J. His name is Quan. 10IV. WRITING:Suppose you are Nguyen Quoc Anh,. Write a short passage about yourself, using the following suggestions. (2.5 pts)  Name  Age  Living place  Name of the school  Class  Number of students in the class My name is Nguyen Quoc Anh…………………………………………………………. * Self – evaluation: …………………………………………………………………………………………………………… …………………………………………………………………………………………………………… …………………………………………………………………………………………………………… ……………………………………………………………………………………………………………. Week: 07 Period 20 Date of planning : 20/09/2013 Date of teaching :. Unit 4 : Big or small? Section : A 1,2,3,4,R. I. Objectives: 1. Knowledge: By the lesson, , Ss will be able to read of a school description & use possessive “s” to talk about possessions. * Grammar . adjectives, possessive,……… * Vocabulary. words related to a1-r 2. Skills: listening, reading, writing 3. Behavior; II.Teaching aids : - Teacher . pictures, textbook, .tape,cassets - Students: textbook III. Steps of teaching: Teacher’s activities I. Warm up: (5’) * Pelnanism. Ss’activities I Your. Write on the board Thu His. He Thu’ s. She Her. My you.

(34) Play in 2 groups, choose the numbers and find the personal pronoun and its possessive pronoun II. Pre reading. (10’) 1. Pre teach vocab: Elicit from the Sts. - big (a): drawing and explaination - small (a): antonym - in the country:( I live in Thaithuy-I live in the country) - in the city: antonym * Check vocab: R.O.R 2. Pre- prediction: - T. gives instruction. We are going to read the texts about Phong’s school and Thu’s school, now sit in 2 groups predict by matching the words(phrase). 3.Present structure Phong’s school is small. Note: “’s” after a person name 4.Practice. Word cue drill. T-S S-T S-S Ex: Is phong’s school small? -yes, it is.. Listen to T’s situation and guess the meanings. Listen and repeat. Go to the board and rewrite the missing words.. 1- Vocabulary. - big (a): to, lớn - small (a): nhỏ - in the country: ở n«ng th«n - in the city: ở thành thị. Poster. Big. 8 classrooms small Phong’s school. 400 students. Thu’s school. Listen to the instruction 20 classrooms Sit in 2 groups 900 students ,predict by In the city in the country matching. Go to the board and do 2-Dialoague build matching Nam: -Is Phong’s school small? Hoa: -Yes, it is Nam: -Is Phong’s school big? Hoa: -No, it isn’t Listen and answer the question. 3-Practice 1.Phong’s school/small/v 2.Thu’s school/big/v 3.Phong’s school/in the city/x 4.Thu’s school/in the country/x. Ask and answer the questions III. While reading. (20’) 1.Check prediction. Now read the texts and check your prediction.. Read the texts and check the prediction. Phong’s school:-small/in the country/8 classrooms/400 students Thu’s school:-big/in the city/20 classrooms/900 students..

(35) 2.Comprehension questions: A 2+A3 (P.44/45) + Lucky numbers: T. gives the instruction. Now sit in 2 groups,read the texts again then answer the questions by playing the game “lucky numbers”. IV. Post reading: (7’) * Chain games: Now sit in group of 4, play the game. Sit in 2 groups, read the texts again then discuss to find out the answers for the questions. Play the game in group of 4 or 5. 6. Lucky numbers. 12a/2ln/32b/42c/52d/6ln/73a/83b/93c/103d/11ln/12ln Answer key 2a-yes, it is 2b-no, it is not 2c-it is in the country 2d-no, it is not 3a-there are 8 3b-there are 400 3c-there are 20 3d-there are 900 Ex: S1-Phong’s school is small. S2-Phong’s school is small and Phong’s school is in the coutry S3-…………………………….. *Home work: (3’) - Do ex1.2.3.4(35/36/37) - Prepare the next lesson * Self – evaluation: …………………………………………………………………………………………………………… …………………………………………………………………………………………………………… …………………………………………………………………………………………………………… ……………………………………………………………………………………………………………. Week: 07 Period 21 Date pf planning : 20/09/2013 Date of teaching :. Unit 4 : BIG OR SMALL ?. Section: B 1,2. I. Objectives: 1. Knowledge: By the end of the lesson, Sts will be able to practice listening, cardinal numbers, Ordinal numbers and “Which” questions to talk about school perfectly. * Grammar . adjectives,possessive,……… *Vocabulary. words related to B1-2 2. Skills: listening, speaking, reading, writing 3. Behavior: II. Teaching aids : - Teacher . pictures, textbook, tape,cassette - Student ., textbook III. Steps of teaching: Teacher’s activities I. Warm up: (5’) * Network Get ss to play in 2 teams, go to the board and list what involve their school. Ss’activities Play the game in 2 teams Go to the board and list what. Write on the board Our school.

(36) involve the school Team1 Give feedback II. Pre-listening: (10’) 1.Pre-teach vacab: Elicit from Sts. - the first: 1st (expl…) - the second: 2nd - the third: 3rd -the fourth= 4ththø 4 … - the tenth: 10th -have (example) * Check vocab: R.O.R. 2. Predict dialogue Set the sence Now, look at the picture. They are Thu and Phong, They are talking about their schools, before listening I want you to work in 4 groups read the uncompleted dialouge then predict the missing words. - T. hangs the poster with the uncompleted dialogue. - Get sts to predict the missing words then pair compare.. - T- Wc.. 1-Vocabulary. - Listen and guess the meanings - Listen and repeat then copy.. - the first= 1st –thø nhÊt ( the first floor-tÇng mét) - the second= 2nd-thø hai (the second floor-tÇng hai)) - the third=3rd-thø 3 -the fourth= 4ththø 4 … - the tenth =10th-thø 10 -have (v) -cã. - Go to the board and rewrite.. Listen Sit in 4 groups and predict the missing words. * Collect Sts’ ideas.. III. While listening: (20’) Now,listen to the dialogue then correct your prediction Play the tape( 2 times) Check with the w.c. Get ss to sit in pairs, practice the dialogue Call some pairs to perform. 14 classrooms Team2. - Listen to the dialogue - Predict individually then pair compare. Sit in pairs, practice the dialogue Perform the dialogue. Poster Thu: Hello, Which grade are you in? Phong: I’m in grade…(a)… Thu: And which class are you in? Phong: …(b)…What about you? Thu: I’m in grade ……(c),class…(d) How many floors does your school have? Phong: …(e)It’s a small school. Thu: My school has…(f)…floor and my classroom is on the…(g) …floor. Where’s your classroom. Phong: It’s on the…(h)…floor. 2-Listen Answerkey a. 6 b. 6A c. 7 d. 7A. e. 2 f. four g. second h.first. * Grid: B2 (P.48) Now, look at the table, read the Poster (with answer key) dialogue between Thu and Phong again then fill in the Grade Class Classroom’s table with the information about Read the dialogue floor again then them and about you, too Thu 7 7C 2nd complete the table Phong 6 * Check with the Wc. 6A 1st with the You infofmation about Thu, Phong and.

(37) themselves. IV. Post listening. (7’) *Noughts and crosses Get ss to use the completed table then play the game noughts and crosses.the team has the correct questions and answers which in a line first is the winner Teacher models - S1: Which grade /class is Thu in? -S2: She’s in grade 6/ class 6A. -S1: Where’s her classroom? -S2: It’s on the second floor. *Descibe. Gets ss to use the information from the table and describe T models Thu is in grade 7, class 7c, her school has 4 floors and her classroom is on the second floor. Listen to the instruction Listen to the model Play the game in 2 teams. Grade Class. Classroom’s floor. Thu. 7. 7C. 2nd. Phong. 6. 6A. 1st. You. 6. 6(a,b,c). 1st. Listen to T’ model Sit in pairs and descibe. * Homework: (3’) - Learn by heart the new words. - Practise speaking English with your friends - Do ex:B1+ B3 ( P.38/39) - Prepare the new lesson: B4-6. * Self – evaluation: …………………………………………………………………………………………………………… …………………………………………………………………………………………………………… …………………………………………………………………………………………………………… ……………………………………………………………………………………………………………. Week: 08 Period 22 Date of planning: 20/09/2013 Date of teaching:. Unit 4: BIG Or SMALL ? Section: B3,4,5,R. I. Objectives: 1.Knowledge: By the end of the lesson, Sts will be able to practice listening, cardinal numbers, Ordinal numbers and “Which” questions to talk about school perfectly. - Further practice with the question: “ How many…?” * Grammar . adjectives, possessive,……… * Vocabulary. words related to B3-R 2. Skills: listening, reading, writing 3. Behavior:.

(38) II. Teaching aids : - Teacher . pictures, textbook, tape, cassette - Student ., textbook III. Steps of teaching: Teacher’s activities I-Warm up: (5’) *Jumbled words Now, play in two teams, go to the board and reorder the words Correct II- New lesson: (10’) 1-Presentation *Present vocabs Elicit the vocabs (to) have/has (example) Where : (revision) Which : (example) *Checking vocab. ROR *Dialogue Build Set the sence Thu and Phogn are talking about their schools, now listen to their dialogue then fill in the missing words Teacher gives feedback and correct answers 2- Practice: (20’) Now, sit in pairs play the roles of Thu and Phong and practice with the completed dialogue Calls some pairs to perform the dialogue *Mapped dialogue Set the sence: This is Mai and this is Tuan. They are talking abot their school, now listen to their dialogue. Ss’activities. Write on the board Irtsf = first Play in two teams, Outrhf = fourth reorder the words in Oncsed = second good order Entht = tenth Vesenht = seventh. Listen Try to find out the meaning Copy Go to the board and rewrite. Listen to the dialogue then find out the missing words. 1. Dialogue Build Thu: Is your school big? Phong: No. It’s ……… Thu: How many floors……..it have? Phong: It …….two floors Thu: Which class…….you in? Phong: I…….in class 6A Thu: Where …….your classroom? Phong: It’s…….the first floor 2.. Sit in pairs and practice with the completed dialogue Get ready to perform the dialogue Listen to T Listen and repeat. 3- Production: (7’) Gets ss to work in pairs, make a similar dialogue themselves “Which” question with (to) be. *Vocabulary (to) have/has (v)-cã Where : §©u, ë ®©u Which : Nµo, c¸i nµo. Sit in pairs make their own dialogue. Tuan. *Mapped dialogue Mai. -Is your school……..(big)? -Yes,it……….(is). -How many……..does it…..(have)? -It ……(has)3……. (floors) -……(which)class …..(are)you….. (in) …..(I) am in …. (class) 6c -…..(where) is your……. (classroom)? -It …..(is) on the…….(third) floor..

(39) “How many” question with (to) have *Homework - Ex:4(39) - Prepare lesson 4 C1,2,3 * Self – evaluation: …………………………………………………………………………………………………………… …………………………………………………………………………………………………………… …………………………………………………………………………………………………………… ……………………………………………………………………………………………………………. Week: 08 Unit 4: BIG or SMALL ? Period: 23 Section: C1,2,3 Date of planning: 20/09/2013 Date of teaching: I. Objectives: 1.Knowledge: By the end of the lesson,Sts will be able to practice talking about habitual actions. * Grammar . adjectives, possessive, present tense……… * Vocabulary. words related to c1-3 2.Skills: listening, reading, writing 3.Behavior: II. Teaching aids : - Teacher : pictures, textbook,. tape, cassettes - Student : textbook III. Teaching steps: Teacher’s activities I. Warm up: (5’) * Chatting.. II. Presentation. (10’) 1. Pre teach vocab: Elicit from Sts. - to get up: picture - to get dressed: picture - to brush (your) teeth: mime - to wash (your) face: mime - to have breakfast: picture - to go to school: picture * Checking vocabs Slap the board. - T. give the instruction... Ss’activities - T – Wc.. Listen and give the answers. - Listen and repeat then copy.. Play the game - Listen to the T.. 2. Presentation text: C 1 (P.49) - Set the scene.. Write on the board. 1- Vocabulary. -(to) get up: thøc dËy -(to) get dressed: mÆc quÇn ¸o chØnh tÒ - (to) brush (your) teeth: đánh răng - (to) wash (your) face: röa mÆt - (to) have breakfast: ¨n s¸ng - (to) go to school: ®i häc.

(40) Look at this boy! Who is he? Yes. he is Ba, these are what he doas before going to school Now, listen and repeat - Play the tape and ask Sts to listen and repeat in chorus - Get Sts to practice reading. * Modle sentences: Elicit from Sts. + What do you do every morning? get up I brush my teeth. Have………… II. Practice (20’) 1- Word cue drill: - T. gives instruction. a. … get up b. …. dressed. c. … teeth. d. …face. e. …. breakfast f. …. school * T. modles S1: What do you do every morning? S2: I get up. S1: What do you then? S2: …… * Make an exchange:T-Wc, H-H, open/close pairs IV. Production. (7’) * Chain games: - T. gives instruction. -T. modles: S1: I get up. S2: I get up and I brush my teeth. S3: ……. He is a student. Listen and repeat. * Modle sentences: + What do you do every morning? get up + I brush my teeth. have………….. + V….. Listen and read Copy. - Listen to the T. - Listen and repeat. - Practice reading. - Listen and give the answers Then repeat, after that copy.. 2-Practice( cards) a. …. get up b. …. get dressed. c. … brush my teeth. d. …wash my face. e. …. breakfast f. …. go to school. - Listen to the T. - Run through.. S1: What do you do every morning? S2: I get up. S1: What do you then? S2: ……. - Listen and repeat. - Practice. - Listen to the T.. S1: I get up. S2: I get up and I brush my teeth. S3: ……. - Play individually.. *Homework : (3’) - Learn by heart the new words. - Write 6 sentences about your routines. - Do ex.1 (P.411) - Practice speaking E. with your friends. - Prepare the new lesson: C 1-3 (P.24) * Self – evaluation: …………………………………………………………………………………………………………….

(41) …………………………………………………………………………………………………………… ……………………………………………………………………………………………………………. Week: 08 Period: 24 Date of planning: 20/09/2013 Date of teaching:. CHỮA BÀI KIỂM TRA. I- Objectives: - By the end of the period, ps know how to do to improve their knowledge and have plan to revise old grammar. II-Language contents: - Review III-Techniques: - Elicit and guild. IV-Teaching aids: - Test sheet V - Procedures: Teacher’s activities 1). Warm up: - How are you to day? - What’s the date? - Who’s absent?. Ps’ activities - Answer teacher’s questions. 2) Correct the test: - Teacher asks ps to do sentence by - Do as the teacher asks. sentence. - Teacher corrects and explains in - Copy. each sentence. - Review for ps grammar and words.. 4) Consolidation: 5- Home work: - Prepare for unit 12: lesson 1. Contents 1.. I. Listening 1. F 2. F 3. T 4. T 5. F 2. II. Reading 1/B 2/ C 3/A 4/ B 5/ D 3. III. Language focus 1. B 2. D 3. G 4. J 5. A 6. H 7. C 8. E 9. F 10. I 4. IV. Writing (Suggestion) My name is Nguyen Quoc Anh. I am twelve years old. I live in Thaithuy. I am a student at Thaithuy School. I am in class 6A. There are forty-five students in my class.. - At home.. * Self – evaluation: …………………………………………………………………………………………………………… …………………………………………………………………………………………………………… …………………………………………………………………………………………………………….

(42) ……………………………………………………………………………………………………………. Duyệt của BGH. Duyệt của tổ trưởng. Week: 09 Unit 4: BIG or SMALL ? Period 25 Section: C4,5,6,7,R Date of planning: 08/10/2013 Date of teaching: A. Objectives: 1.Knowledge: By the end of the lesson, Sts will be able to practice telling the time clearly and exactly. * Grammar . adjectives, possessive, present tense……… * Vocabulary. words related to C4-R 2.Skills: listening, reading, writing 3.Behavior: B. Teaching aids : - Teacher : pictures, textbook,. tape, cassettes - Student : textbook. C. Steps of teaching: Teacher’s activities I. Warm up: (5’) * Chatting. II. Presentation. (10’) 1 . Number dictation. T. gives instruction. Now listen and write the numbers you hear. T. reads: One ten/ four thirty/ five twenty/ three fifteen/ six forty/ seven forty five/ ten thirty/ twelve twenty five/ eleveen fifty/ two fifty five. Check with the wc. 2. Pre teach vocab: Elicit from Sts. the time: ( ten) oclock: half: past: To be late for… Check vocab: R.O.R 3. Presentation pictures : C 4- 5 (P.50) *Dialogue build: T. gives instruction. T. modles:. Ss’activities. Write on the board. T-Wc. Listen to the T. Listen and write individually.. Give the answers. Listen and give the answers. Listen and repeat then copy them into your notebooks.. 1-Vocabulary - the time:thời gian - ( ten) o’clock: đồng hồ, giờ - half:30 phút - past: h¬n, qu¸, qua To be late for… muộn, trể. Go to the board to rewrite. 2-Dialogue build: Listen to the T. Listen and repeat.. S1-What ….. … it? S2- ….. …..eight …..

(43) + What time is it? + It’s eight(o’clock) ten fifteen. half past ten. Make an exchange: T-wc, H-H, open/close pairs. III. Practice: (20’) 1. Pictures drill. T. gives instruction. Now, look at the pictures then ask and answer about the time T. modles: What time is it? It is/ two ten./ Make exchanges: T-Wc, H-H, open/close pairs. T. corrects if necessary. 2. Word cue drill: C 7 (P.51) T. gives instruction. get up/have breakfast/go to school go home/have dinner/do homework * T modles: S1: What time do you get up? S2: I get up at six o’clock. + Make exchanges: T-Wc, H-H, open/close pairs. IV. Production. (7’) 1.Noughts and crosses. - T. gives instruction. Now, work in two teams, play the game by asking and telling the time * T. modles: S1: What time is it? S2: It’s / six ten/ * Homework. (3’). Listen to the instruction. Listen. Listen and repeat. Practice asking and telling the time Look at the pictures and run through.. *Model S1: What time do you get up? S2: I get up at six o’clock.. Practice. Listen to the T. Run through.. Listen to the instruction Listen to T’ model Listen to the T. Play in two teams.. 6.10 7.00 3.15. 6.30 11.00 4.20. 6.45 11.30 4.55. - Learn the new words by heart. - Practice telling the time with a partner. - Do ex. 4, 5, 6 (P.42-43) - Prepare the new lesson: Unit 5 : A 1-2. * Self – evaluation: …………………………………………………………………………………………………………… …………………………………………………………………………………………………………… ……………………………………………………………………………………………………………. Week: 09 Period: 26 Date of planning: 08/10/2013. Unit 5 : Things I do. Section: A 1,2 (P.52-53).

(44) Date of teaching: A. Objectives: 1.Knowledge: By the end of the lesson, Sts will be able to practice the simple present tense with “ I, he, she” to talk about daily routines perfectly. * Grammar . adverds of time , present tense……… * Vocabulary. words related to A1-2 2. Skills: listening, reading, writing 3. Behavior: B.Teaching aids : - Teacher : pictures, textbook,. tape, cassettes - Student : textbook C. Steps of teaching: Teacher’s activities Students’activities Content on the board * Warm up: (5’) 1. Revision: Guessing game. - Look at the board. - Write the things on the - A student to - 6. Play games board. come to the front - Get a student to come and choose one of - 7.10 to the front and choose the things. one of the things - The rest of the - 9.15 - Get the rest of the class class to guess Get up to guess what time it is. which thing it is. - 8.30 The first student guesses * Student1: What Have breakfast the time correctly comes time is it ? up to the front, chooses a * Student2: Is it 6 Do your homework new time and the game o’clock? cotinues * Student1:Yes, It is /No,It isn’t 1. Presentation: (10’) Elicit vocabulary  Explanatio n  Situation  Visual. - Listen to the teacher. 1-Vocabulary: - Repeat after the -(to) do your homework: Lµm bµi tËp ë nhµ teacher. - Every day : mçi ngµy. - Notice the main - (to) play games : ch¬i trß ch¬i. stress pattern. - Write the new words in their notebooks. Slap the board Group works. - Put the English words - Say the English of on the board. words . - Call two students of - Listen to the two teams to the front of teacher. the class. - Run forward and Go to school - Call out one of the slap the correct Vietnamese translation in words on the board. loud voice. - Continue until students have slapped all the words. Presentation text. 2. Presentation: + Target language: - Set the scene: Nga is - Listen to the Nga gets up, goes to school, plays games,.

(45) talking about her daily routines. - Let students to listen to the cassette and answer: What does Nga do every day? - Show them the difference of the verbs when the subject is the 3rd person singular. 2. Practice: (20’) - Get students to repeat the sentence with the target item in it. - Call out one word to be changed in the sentence: +Every day I get up at 6. + Nga. - Do the same for the seccond picture. - Correct their mistakes.. 3. Production: (7’) - Have students look at the table on the board. - Ask students to ask and answer questions about their daily routines . -Correct if there are any mistakes. teacher’s explanation. - listen to the cassette and answer: She gets up, goes to school…… - Isolate the model sentence by answer the teacher’s questions. - Listen to the teacher. - Repeat the sentence with the target item in it. - Make the change and repeat the new sentence. +Every day I get up at 6. +Every day Nga gets up at 6. - Practice in pairs. - Some pairs practice in front.. does her homework He/She + V(s/es) +…….. - Thông thường thêm “s” (gets up,…) - Tận cùng s, x, o, sh, ch thêm “es” (gets up, goes, plays, does,…) - Nói hooạt động hằng ngày với chủ từ là He/ She ( ngôi thứ ba số ít). 3. Practice : Every day I get up at 6. - I wash my face. - I get dressed. - I have breakfast. - I go to school. - I play games. - I do my homework.. 4.Further practice:. - Look at the board and listen to the do have play teacher. your Name get up breakf game - Ask and answer home- ast s questions about work their daily routines. Mai 6.00 6.15 4.30 7.00 - Some students …… …… …… …… ……… retell their partners’ … … … … daily routines. * Homework: (3’) - Take notes and 5.Homework: - Ask students to learn by memorize - Vocabulary of routines. heart vocabulary of - Do as the teacher - He / She + động từ thêm “s / es” . routines and simple requests. - Unit 5: Thing I do – Lesson 2 : A3 - A4. present tense with I, he and she. - Have them prepare Unit 5 - Lesson 2:(A3 – A4): “Wh” questions with he, she to talk about daily routines. * Self – evaluation: …………………………………………………………………………………………………………… …………………………………………………………………………………………………………… …………………………………………………………………………………………………………….

(46) Week: 09 Period: 27 Date of planning: 08/10/2013 Date of teaching:. Unit 5 : Things I do. Section: A 3, 4 (P.52-53). A. Objectives: 1.Knowledge: By the end of the lesson, students will be able to ask and answer about other people’s daily routines by using “ Wh” questions. * Grammar, adverds of time , present tense……… * Vocabulary. words related to A3-4 2. Skills: listening, reading, writing 3. Behavior: B. Teaching aids : - Teacher : pictures, textbook,.tape, cassettes - Student : textbook C. Steps of teaching: Teacher’s activities Students’ activities Content on the board * Warm up (5’) - Ask students to ask - Listen to the 1.Revision: and answer questions teacher. about their daily - Ask and answer do have routines . questions about get play your Name breakf- Ask some students to their daily routines. up games homeast retell their partners’ - Some students work daily routines. retell their partners’ Phu 5.30 6.05 4.30 7.25 daily routines. …... … … ... …. 1. Presentation: (10’) Visual - Listen to the 1- Vocabulary: Explanation teacher. - (to) listen to music : nghe nhạc. Mine - Repeat after the - (to) do the housework: làm việc nhà Visual teacher. - (to) read : đọc - Notice the main - (to) watch TV : xem TV. stress pattern. - Write the new words in their notebooks. Ordering vocabulary - Write the new words on the board. - Get students to copy the words in their books. - Read a short passage about Lan’s daily routines.. - Look at the board. - Copy the words in their books. - Listen to the teacher and put the words in the correct order by numbering them.. + Checking vocabulary: Every morning, Lan gets up and listens to music. In the afternoon, she comes home and does the housework. Then she watches TV. In the evening, she does her homework and reads books. Presentation text. - Set the scene: Ba, Lan, Nam and Thu are talking about what they. - Listen to the teacher’s explanation. - Read the text. 2. Presentation: + Target language: + What does Lan do after school? + What does Ba do after school? + What does Thu do after school?.

(47) do after school. - Let students to read the text. - Ask students to answer the questions ( a –b) - Let students isolate the model sentences by asking and answering the questions. 2. Practice: (20’) - Run through the cues. - Hold up the first cues and say the model sentences. - What does Ba do after school ? - He watches television. - Do the same for the second cue. - Correct their mistakes. 3. Production: (7’) * Nought and crosses - Put the grid on the board. - Divide class into teams. One is noughts (O) and the other is Crosses (X). - Two teams choose any things in the boxes and ask questions about what things are . - The team which has three noughts or three crosses on a line will win the game.. about What Ba, Lan, Nam and Thu do after school. - Answer the questions (a–b) - Isolate the model sentences by asking and answering the questions.. + What does Nam do after school? + Form: What + does + Tªn/he/she+ do …? Tªn/he/she + V(s / es). - Hỏi người khác (ngôi thứ 3 số ít) làm gì ( sau giờ học ) 3. Practice:. - Look at the cues. - Listen to the teacher. - Repeat it chorally and then individually. - Make the sentence for themselves. - Practice in pairs. - Some pairs practice in front.. - Ba / watch television. - Lan / do the housework. - Nam / listen to music. - Thu / read.. 4.Further practice: - Look at the board. - Work in groups. - One is noughts (O) and the other is Crosses (X). - Choose any phrases in the boxes, ask and ask questions about what they do … ( Use every morning / afternoon / evening in their questions ). - Congratulate the winner.. He / play games. She / brush her teeth. Ba / get dressed. Nam / go to school. She / wash her face. He / have breakfast. Lan / do the housework She / do her homework Mai / listen to music. * Homework: (3’) - Ask students to learn by heart vocabulary of routines and “Wh” questions with he and she. - Have them prepare Unit 5 - Lesson 2:(A5 – A6): * Self – evaluation:. - Take notes and memorize - Do as the teacher requests.. - Vocabulary of routines. - What + does + Tªn/he/she+ do …? - Tên/he/she + V(s / es). - Unit 5: Thing I do – Lesson 3 : A5 - A6.. …………………………………………………………………………………………………………….

(48) Week: 10 Period: 28 Date of planning: 08/10/2013 Date of teaching:. UNIT 5: THING I DO Section: MY DAY (A5, A6, R). A. Objective: 1. Knowledge: By the end of the lesson, students will be able to ask and answer about daily routines by using “ Yes / No” questions of the simple present tense. * Grammar, adverbs of time , present tense……… * Vocabulary. words related to A5- R 2. Skills: listening, reading, writing 3. Behavior: B. Teaching aids : - Teacher : pictures, textbook,. tape, cassette - Student : textbook C. Steps of teaching: Teacher’s activities I-Warm up (5’) * Pelmanism. - Stick 10 cards on the board so that the students can only see the numbers, make sure the words are mixed up. - Divide the slass into two teams and ask students to choose two numbers. - Go on until the cards are turned over. II- Presentation: (10’) * Elicit vocabulary Visual Visual Explanation * Checking vocabs Rub out and remember -Point to the Vietnamese translations and rub out English words. - Get students to call the English words. III- Practice (20’) - Set the scene. - Read the dialogue and write few key words on the board to help students remember what the two. Students’ activities. - Look at the board. - Listen to the teacher’s explanation. - Work in teams. - One of student in each team chooses any two numbers. - Go on until the cards are turned over.. Content on the board 1 2 3 6 7 8 1= watch 2= play 3= television 4= do 5= soccer 6= listen to 7= music 8= brush 9= homework 10= teeth. 4 9. 5 10. - Listen to the teacher. - Repeat after the 1-Vocabulary: teacher. -(to)play volleyball: chơi bóng chuyền - Notice the main - (to) play football :chơi bong đá¸ stress pattern. - Sports : thể thao - Write the new words in their notebooks. - Students repeat chorally and remember all the English words. - Call the English words and write the English words if there is time. 2-Dialogue build. -Answer the teacher’s + Target language: A5(page 54) question. Ba: What do Thu and Vui do after - Look at the board and school? listen to the teacher Lan: They play soccer. carefully. Ba: Do girls play soccer? - Reproduce the L: Yes, they do..

(49) dialogue from the cues. - Build the dialogue until it is memorized. - Write in the missing words on the board.. Ba: Do you play soccer? L: No, I don’t. Ba: Does Nga play soccer? Lan: No, she doesn’t. speaker in the dialogue say *Form to each other . -Do +you / they + V(inf)….? + Yes, I / they + do >< No, I / they - Get students to write in the don’t. missing words on the board. - Does he / she + V(inf)…….? - Get students to isolate the +Yes, he/she does >< No, he/she model sentence. doesn’t. *Use Hỏi ngời nào đó có làm việc gì đó hay kh«ng vµ tr¶ lêi cã hay kh«ng ( yes/no) * True / False Questions 3. Practice : A6 ( page 55) -Answer Drill - Listen to the tape. a) Do you play sports? - Let students listen to the - Teacher – student. b) Do you watch television? tape. - Answer the teacher’s c) Do you do the housework? - Ask a Yes / No question questions. The answers d) Do you play volleyball? with the target structure in it. are real answers. e) Do you listen to music? The question is a real + Yes, I do / No, I f) Do you read? question. don’t. g) Do you do your homework? + Do you play any sports ? - Let students answer truthfully. IV- Production: (7’) - Look at the board. 1. Find someone who - Work in groups. 4.Further practice: - Put the table on the board. - Stand up and ask - Get students to get into each orther questions. groups. When they find Action Name - Get students to ask each someone who says ………watches TV Lan other questions. “Yes” they fill in the ………plays football + Teacher: Do you watch name. They can’t fill in ………does the TV? someone’s name more housework + Student (Lan): Yes, I than once. ………plays volleyball do. - Tell the teacher what ………listen to music - Correct if there are any they have found, e.g. “ ………reads mistakes. Lan watches TV ”. - Feedback. *Homework: (3’) - Vocabulary. - Do you / they + V(inf)..?-Yes/No. - Does he / she + V(inf)..?-Yes/No. - Exercises in the workbook from page 43 to 46. - Unit 5: Thing I do – MY ROUTINE - Section : B1,2,3,R * Self – evaluation: …………………………………………………………………………………………………………… …………………………………………………………………………………………………………… …………………………………………………………………………………………………………….

(50) Week: 10 Period: 29 Date of planning: 08/10/2013 Date of teaching:. UNIT 5: THING I DO Section: MY ROUTINE ( B1,2,3,R). A. Objectives: 1. Knowledge: By the end of the lesson, students will be able to understand about Ba’s daily routine to practice Simple present tense. * Grammar .adverbs of time , present tense……… * Vocabulary. words related to section B1-R 2. Skills: listening, speaking, reading 3. Behavior: B. Teaching aids : - Teacher : pictures, textbook,.tape, cassettes - Student : textbook C. Steps of teaching : Teacher’s activities I-Warm up (5’) * Jumbled words -Write numbers whose letters are in disorder. - Divide the class into two teams. - Ask students from each team to go to the board and write the correct words . II- Presentation: (10’) - Elicit vocabulary Visual Picture Translation Antonym Situation Situation - Checking What and where - Elicit the vocabulary from the students and write them in the circles. - Get students to repeat the words including the rubbed out words by pointing at the empty circle. III. Practice (20’) 1. Predict Grid - Set the scene: Ba is talking about his daily activities . - Have students copy the table. - Get students to guess about Ba’s daily activities by writing. Students’ activities -Look at the board. - Listen to the teacher. - Work in teams. - Go to the board and write the correct words. (One word, one student). - Listen to the teacher. - Repeat after the teacher. - Notice the main stress pattern. - Write the new words in their notebooks.. Content - tislen - arde - tchaw - pyla. = = = =. listen read watch father. Finish Eat. 1-Vocabulary: - (to) take a shower : t¾m vßi sen. - (to) eat: ¨n. - (to) start: b¾t ®Çu. - (to) finish: kÕt thóc. - (to) have lunch: ¨n tra. - (to) go to bed: ®i ngñ.. - Students repeat chorally and remember all the words. - Go to the board and fill in the circles with the right words. - Listen to the teacher. - Pay attention to the teacher’s planation. - Students copy the table. - Guess about Ba’s. Go to bed Take a shower Start. B2 (page 57) Action get up go to school class start class finish. Time Ba. Me.

(51) the time in figures.. daily activities by writing the time in figures.. - Ask students to read the text and check their prediction. - Ask students to reread the text by themselves. Substitution drill - Get students to repeat the question. - Call out phrases to be changed in the question: +What time does Ba get up?. + go to school. - Do the same for the seccond picture. - Correct their mistakes.. - Read the text and check their prediction. - Reread the text by themselves. - Listen to the teacher and repeat follow the teacher. - Make the change and repeat the new question. + What time does Ba get up? + What time does Ba go to school? - Practice in pairs. - Some pairs practice in front. - use the table on page 57 again. - Work in pairs. - Ask each other questions and fill in the time. + What time do you go to school? + I go to school at…………. - Tell the teacher what they have asked their partner, e.g. “ Nam gets up at 5.30. He……… ”.. IV. Production: (7’) - Ask students to use the table on page 57 again. - Get students to get into pairs. - Get students to ask each other questions. + What time do you get up? + I get up at…………. - Correct if there are any mistakes. - Feedback.. have lunch go home go to bed 2- reading: - get up: 6.00 - have lunch: 11.30 - go to school: 6.45 - go home: 5.00 - classes start: 7.00 - go to bed: 10.00 - classes finish: 11.15 2. Reading comprehension - What time does Ba get up? - He gets up at 6.00 - What time does he go to school? - He go to school at 6.45 - What time does he have classes? - He has classes at 7.00 - What time does he have lunch? - He has lunch at 11.30 - What time does he go home? - He goes home at 5.00 3-Further practice: Action get up go to school class start class finish have lunch go home go to bed. Me 5.30. *Homework: (3’) - Vocabulary. - Exercises in the workbook from page 46 to 49. - Unit 5: Thing I do – CLASSES - Section : C1. * Self – evaluation: ... …………………………………………………………………………………………………… ………………………………………………………………………………………………… ...………………………………………………………………………………………………….

(52) Week: 10 Period: 30 Date of planning: 08/10/2013 Date of teaching:. UNIT 5: THING I DO Section: CLASSES (C1). A. Objectives: 1.Knowledge:By the end of the lesson, students will be school subject vocabulary with “ Have / Don’t have ” to talk about school timetable. * Grammar .adverbs of time , present tense……… * Vocabulary. words related to section C1 2. Skills: listening, reading 3. Behavior: B.Teaching aids : - Teacher : pictures, textbook,.tape, cassettes - Student : textbook C. Steps of teaching: Teacher’s activities I-Warm up (5’) * Word Square - Write the word of the square on the board. - Tell the students what the topic is and how many hidden words are there. - Get the students to come to the board and circle any words they can see. II-Presentation: (15’) - Elicit vocabulary Situation Visual Situation Visual Situation Translation Visual - Checking vocabs - Ordering vocabulary - Write the new words on the board in the wrong order. - Get students to copy the words in their books. - Read a short passage. Students’ activities. Content on the board Revision:. - Look at the word of the square on the board. - Listen to the teacher and answer the teacher questions. + There are 19 hidden workds - Come to the board and circle any words they can see.. H S T A R T T O. O L D G O W M F. M I O W N A U I. E S P O R T S N. W T L R E C I I. O E A K A H C S. R N Y O D T V H. K T A K E E A T. start, to, old, go, sports, TV, take, eat. homework,listen, do,play,read,watch... 1-Vocabulary: - a timetable(n) : thêi khãa biÓu - Listen to the teacher. - English (n) : tiÕng anh - Repeat after the - Math (n): to¸n teacher. - Literature (n) : v¨n - Notice the main stress - history (n): lÞch sö - geography (n): địa lý pattern. - Monday : thø hai - Write the new words in their notebooks. - Look at the board. - Copy the words in their books. - Listen to the teacher and put the words in the correct order by numbering them.. First We have literature. Then We have geography. At eight forty We have English and then We have Math .At ten fifteen We have history. This is our timetable on Monday..

(53) about a timetable on Monday. Presentation text. - Set the scene: They are talking about their timetable. - Ask students to listen to the text about the timetable. - Isolate the model sentences by underlining the model sentences and asking students some questions: + What ‘s this? + What comes after…? III- Practice: (15’) - Run through the cues. - Hold up the first cues and say the model sentences. + What do we have today ? + We have math . + What time does it start? + It starts at (Seven fifty). - Correct their mistakes. IV- Production: (7’) - Mapped dialogue - Put the dialogue on the board which is only words. The words are cues. - Model the dialogue. - Run through the cues like a drill with the whole class. 4-.Homework: - Ask students to learn by heart vocabulary and “ have/don’t have” to talk about the timetable - Have them prepare Unit 5 - Lesson 6: (C2,3,R): “Has/doesn’t have” to talk about the weekly timetable. * Self – evaluation:. - Listen to the teacher’s explanation. - Listen to the text about the timetable. - Answer the questions (a–b) - Understand of the target language in term of meaning, use and form by answering the questions.. + Target language: - C1 (page 58) + I don’t have my timetable. + What do we have today? + It’s Monday today. We have English. S + have + danh từ( môn học) S + do not have + danh từ (môn học). - Look at the cues. 2 Practice: - Listen to the teacher. - Repeat it chorally and - Math / 7.50 - Geography / 10.15 then individually. - English / 7.00 - Make the sentence for themselves. - Literature /8.30 - Practice in pairs. - Some pairs practice in - History / 9.35 front.. - Look at the board and listen to the teacher. - Repeat after the teacher. - Practice the dialogue in pair . - Some pairs practice in front. - Rewrite the dialogue . - Take notes and memorize - Do as the teacher suggests.. - School subject vocabulary. - S + have + danh từ (môn học). - S + don’t have + danh từ (môn học). - Unit 5: Thing I do – CLASSES Lesson 6 : C2 – C3..

(54) ... …………………………………………………………………………………………………… ………………………………………………………………………………………………… ...…………………………………………………………………………………………………. Duyệt của BGH. Week: 11. Duyệt của tổ trưởng.

(55) Period: 31 Date of planning: 20/10/2013 Date of teaching:. UNIT 5: THING I DO Section: C - CLASSES (C2,3,R). A. Objectives: 1. Knowledge: By the end of the lesson, students will be able to use days of week vocabulary with “Has / doesn’t have” to talk about the weekly timetable. - excellent students can show their own schedule in English * Grmmar: Revise: when do we have (math)? -we have it on Tuesday,… * vocabulary: in unit 5 C2,3,R 2. Skills: listening, reading, writing 3. Behavior: B. Teaching aids : - Teacher : pictures, textbook,. tape, cassettes - Student : textbook C. Steps of teaching : Teacher’s activities I-Warm up (5’) Slap the board - Put the English words of on the board. - Call two students of two teams to the front of the class. - Call out one of the Vietnamese translation in loud voice. II- Presentation: (10’) - Elicit vocabulary - Use the situation to introduce the days of the week. - Say the days of the week and let students repeat. - Ask students to write the new words in their notebooks. Matching - Put the Vietnamese translation and English words on the board. -Ask students to match English words with the Vietnamese translation . - Ask students to work in teams. Predict dialogue. Students’ activities Group works. - Say the English words . - Listen to the teacher. - Run forward and slap the correct words on the board. - Continue until students have slapped all the words.. - Listen to the teacher. - Repeat after the teacher. - Notice the main stress pattern. - Write the new words in their notebooks. Group works. - Lookl at the board. - Listen to the teacher. - Work in teams. - Come to the board and match English words with the Vietnamese translation.. Content on the board. 1-Vocabulary: - Tuesday : thø ba. - Wenesday : thø t. - Thursday : thø n¨m. - Friday : thø 6. - Saturday : thø b¶y. - Sunday : chñ nhËt. - Tuesday - Wenesday - Thursday - Friday - Saturday - Sunday. - Thø b¶y - Thø t - Thøba - Chñ nhËt - Thø s¸u - Thø hai. 2. Presentation: + Target language:.

(56) - Set the scene: Lan is talking to Nam about her classmate. - PutTthe 2 dialogue T 3 on T4 the board. Some of the Toán Văn Sử words are missing. AV Văn - AskToán students to guess what the missing words AV are. - Isolate the model sentence by asking students some questions + Does Lan have math on friday? - Tell them about the short form of “does not” - Ask students to copy the notes and memorize. III- Practice: (20’) - Board drill -Put Ly’s timetable on the board - Run through the timetable. - Point to and say the model sentences. + When does she have math ? + She has it on Monday,Thursday and Friday. - Correct their mistakes. IV- Production: (7’) Survey - Get students to fill in their real timetable (only the 5 subjects they have learnt in English). - Get them to practice in pairs: + When do you have math? + On ................................ - Feedback. * .Homework: - Ask students to learn by heart vocabulary and Simple present. - Listen to the teacher. - Read the dialogue. T- 5GuessTwhat 6 the T7 missing words are. Toán AV Văn - Understand the Sử Văn model Toán sentence. - Answer the teacher’s questions:. Nga: When do we have history? Ba:We have it on tuesday and thursday Nga: When do we have math? Ba:We have it on Monday , Wenesday and Friday. Nga: Does Lan have math on Friday? Ba: No, she doesn’t have math on Friday. She has it on Saturday. + No, she doesn’t have S + has + danh tõ (m«n häc) math on Friday. She S + does not have + danh tõ (m. h) has it on Saturday. - Copy the notes and - S ( He, She ) memorize. - Has ( ‘s ) : Cã(Häc). - Does not ( doesn’t ) have : Kh«ng cã. (Kh«ng häc). - Read the timetable silently. - Say the subjects in English. - Repeat it chorally and then individually. - Make the questions and answers for themselves. - Practice in pairs. - Some pairs practice in front.. 3. Practice: Ly’s timetable. - Fill in their real 4.Further practice: C2 (page 59) timetable (only the 5 subjects they have learnt in English). - Practice in pairs. - Tell the teacher what they have asked their partner, e.g.“Lan has math on… But she doesn’t have it on………. - Take notes and memorize - Do homework as. - Vocabulary (from lesson1 to 5). - Simple present tense: The time, daily routines, school timetable and weekly.

(57) tense: The time, daily requested. timetable. routines, school - Exercises in the workbook from page 53 timetable and weekly to 55. timetable. - Unit 5: Thing I do - Lesson 7 : - Have them do some GRAMMAR PRACTICE. exercises in the workbook (page 53 – 55) and prepare Unit 5 - Lesson 7: GRAMMAR PRACTICE. * Self – evaluation: ... …………………………………………………………………………………………………… …………………………………………………………………………………………………… ………………………………………………………………………………………………… Week: 11 Peroid: 32 Date of planning: 20/10/2013 Date of teaching:. Grammar practice. A. Objectives: 1. Knowledge: By the end of the lesson, students will be able to use grammar points above fluently. use Simple present, Adjective with “Be”, Qs words, school subject, Days of the week * Grammar .adjectives, question words, present tense……… * Vocabulary. words related to grammar practice 2. Skills: listening, reading, writing 3. Behavior: B. Teaching aids : - Teacher : pictures, textbook,. tape, cassettes - Student : textbook C. Steps of teaching : Teacher’s activities I- Warm up (5’) Picture drill - Run through the pictures. - Hold up the first picture and say the model sentences: +What time is it? + It’s six o’clock. - Do the same for the seccond picture. - Correct their mistakes.. Students’ activities - Look at the pictures. - Listen to the teacher. - Repeat it chorally and then individually. - Make the sentence for themselves. - Practice in pairs. - Some pairs practice in front.. Content on the board a) 7.00. d) 12.00. b) 9.15. e) 1.45. c) 4.30. f) 8.50.

(58) II. Practice: (20’) *Gap fill - Have students read exercises 1, 7 on page 60, 61 and fill in the blanks with the correct form of the verbs. Word cue drill - Run through the cues. - Hold up the first cues and say the model sentences. - Is your { house } big ? - Yes,it is / No, it isn’t. - Do the same for the second cue. - Correct their mistakes. Answers given - Show students the statements. - Let students ask questions. - Ask them to work in pairs -Correct if there are any mistakes Lucky numbers - Write the numbers on the board. - Divide class into teams. The teams take turn to choose the numbers. - Tell students that they have to answer the questions . III. Production: (15’). 1. Practice: Simple present tense - Work individually. 1a) get/get, get/gets, get/get. - Read exercise 1, 2, 3. 1b) do/have/have, does/have/has. - Complete the sentences with 1c) do/go…, does/go/goes. the correct form of To be. 1d) do/wash/../does/wash/washes. - Do exercises orally. 7 a)gets b)takes c)brushes d)has e)goes. 1. - Look at the cues. - Listen to the teacher. - Repeat it chorally and then individually. - Make the sentence for themselves. - Practice in pairs. - Some pairs practice in front.. - Look at the board. - Read the statements. - Ask questions. - Work in pairs.. (3) Adjectives: - house. - school - city. - country. - street. - family. - living room.. 2. (4) Question words: a. My house is on Mai Dich Street. b. It has two floors. e. N-G-A. c. My name’s Nga. g. I’m in grade 6. d. I go to Cau Giay school.. - Look at the board. - Work in teams. - Take turn to choose the numbers. - Answer the questions.. 3. (5) Classes: 1 2 3 4 5 6 1. c). When do you have geography? 2. a) When do you have literature?. 3. Lucky number. 4. d) Which classes do you have on Friday / Monday? 5. Lucky number. 6. b) When do you have math?. *Further practice:.

(59) * Nought and crosses - Put the grid on the board. - Divide class into teams. One is noughts (O) and the other is Crosses (X). - Two teams choose any things in the boxes and ask questions about what things are . - The team which has three noughts or three crosses on a line will win the game. - i) What time do you do your homework?. - Look at the board. - Work in groups. - One is noughts (O) and the other is Crosses (X). - Choose any phrases in the boxes, ask and ask questions about what they do … ( Use every morning / afternoon / evening in their questions ). - Congratulate the winner.. i. e. b. g. d. f. a. c. h. * Homework: (5’) - Vocabulary (from lesson1 to 5). - Ask students to learn - Take notes and memorize - Simple present tense: The time, by heart vocabulary - Do as th teacher requests. daily routines, school timetable and and Simple present weekly timetable. tense - Unit 6: Places - Lesson 1 :A1 – A3. - Have them prepare Unit 6 - Lesson 1: Understanding the details and practising country vocabulary. * Self – evaluation: ... …………………………………………………………………………………………………… ………………………………………………………………………………………………… ...………………………………………………………………………………………………… Week: 11 Period: 33 Date of planning: 20/10/2013 Date of teaching:. UNIT 6: PLACES Section: A - OUR HOUSE (A1,2,3). A.Objectives: 1. Knowledge: By the end of the lesson, students will be able to understand the content of the text and use country vocabulary fluently. * Grammar: preposition of places: near, in * Vocabulary: lake, river, park, hotel, trees, flowers, rice paddy,… 2. Skills: listening, reading, writing 3. Behavior: B.Teaching aids : - Teacher : pictures, textbook,. tape, cassettes - Student: textbook C. Steps of teaching : Teacher’s activities I- Warm up (5’). Students’ activities. Content on the board.

(60) * Shark’s attack - Divide the class into two teams. - Ask each team for a letter in the alphabet. - Ask students from each team to guess the word. - The game countinues until students find out the word. II- Presentation: (10’) Elicit vocabulary  Picture  Drawing  Drawing  Realia  Situation  Situation What and where - Elicit the vocabulary from the students and write them in the circles. - Get students to repeat the words including the rubbed out words by pointing at the empty circle. Open prediction - Show students the things and ask: + What’s near Thuy’s house? - Ask students to write three things in their books. III- Practice: (20’) - Ask students to read the text and check their prediction. - Ask students to reread the text by themselves. Matching - Put the Vietnamese translation and English words on the board. -Ask students to match English words with the Vietnamese translation . - Ask students to work in teams. Lucky numbers. . - Work in teams. -Look at the board. - Listen to the teacher. - Give a letter in the alphabet. - Have to try to guess the word. - Find out the word. - Listen to the teacher. - Repeat after the teacher. - Notice the main stress pattern. - Write the new words in their notebooks. Students repeat chorally and remember all the words. - Go to the board and fill in the circles with the right words. - Listen to the teacher and answer the questions + a lake, a river, a park… - Students to write three things in their books.. . 1-Vocabulary: - a lake : caùi hoà. - a river : con soâng. - Trees : caây coái. - Flowers : boâng hoa. - a rice paddy : cánh đồng. - a park : coâng vieân.. flowers river lake rice paddy trees park A1 (page 62) - a lake. - a park. - a river. - a rice paddy. - Trees. - Flowers. 2. Matching - Read the text and - a lake - a rice paddy check their prediction. - a park - Reread the text by themselves. - near - xinh đẹp Group works. - Lookl at the board. - a yard - khaùch saïn - Listen to the teacher. - Work in teams. - beautiful - gaàn - Come to the board and match English - a hotel - saân words with the Vietnamese Reading comprehension translation. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7.

(61) - Write the numbers on the board. - Divide class into teams. The teams take turn to choose the numbers. - Tell students that they have to answer the questions .. - Look at the board. - Work in teams. - Take turn to choose the numbers. Answer the questions.. 8 1. c). What’s her brother’s name ? 2. a) How old is Thuy?. 3. Lucky number. 8. Lucky number. 4. d) How old is he? 5. e) Where does Thuy live? 6. b) What does she do? 7. f) What’s there, near the house?. IV- Production: (7’) 3. Answering: - Picture drill - Run through the a) Trees d) a park pictures. - Look at the pictures. b) a rice paddy e) a river - Hold up the first picture - Listen to the and say the model teacher. c) a lake f) a house sentences: - Repeat it chorally +What are those / is and then individually. that? - Make the sentence + They are…… / it for themselves. is…… - Practice in pairs. - Do the same for the - Some pairs practice seccond picture. in front. - Correct their mistakes. * Homework: (3’) - Ask students to learn by - Take notes and - Vocabulary. heart vocabulary. memorize - A1 – A2. - Have them write the - Do as the teacher - Unit 6: Places – OUR HOUSE answers in the notebook suggests. Lesson 2 : A4 – A5. and prepare Unit 6 Lesson 2:(A4-A5): Describing places where we live * Self – evaluation: ... …………………………………………………………………………………………………… ………………………………………………………………………………………………… ...………………………………………………………………………………………………… Week: 12 Period 34 Date of planning: 20/10/2013 Date of teaching:. UNIT 6: PLACES Section: OUR HOUSE (A 4,5,). A.Objectives: 1.Knowledge: By the end of the lesson, students will be able to use town and country vocabulary to describe places where we live grammar points above fluently. * Grammar .present tense……… * Vocabulary: review words related to the first period 2. Skills: listening, reading, writing 3. Behavior: B. Teaching aids :.

(62) - Teacher : pictures, textbook,. tape, cassettes - Student : textbook C. Steps of teaching : Teacher’s activities I. Warm up: (5’) * Bingo - Put the table on the board. -Ask students to choose any four words in a, b, c and copy them into their books. - Let students listen to the cassette. II. Presentation: (10’)  Situation  Situation  Situation  Visual * Slap the board - Put the Vietnamese translation on the board. - Call two students of two teams to the front of the class. - Call out one of the English words in loud voice. III. Practice: (20’) -Picture drill - Run through the pictures. - Hold up the first picture and say the model sentences: +There’s a hotel near our house. + They are trees near our house. - Do the same for the seccond picture. - Correct their mistakes. * Guessing game. - Write the things on the board. - Get a student to come to the front and choose one of the things - Get the rest of the class to guess what time it is. The first student guesses the time correctly comes up to the front, chooses a new time and the game cotinues. Students’ activities -Look at the board. - Listen to the teacher. - Choose any four words. - Put ticks next to the words that they listen to. - Shouts “Bingo”. - Listen to the teacher. - Repeat after the teacher. - Notice the main stress pattern. - Write the new words in their notebooks. Group works. - Say the Vietnamese translation . - Listen to the teacher. - Run forward and slap the correct words on the board. - Continue until students have slapped all the words.. Content on the board a) hotel b) country c) rice paddy river 1-Vocabulary: - a town : thị trấn, phố - a village : làng, xã. - a city : thành phố. - the country : miền quê.. thÞ trÊn , phè Lµng, x·. MiÒn quª. Thµnh phè. 2- Practice: A5 (page 64) - Look at the pictures. a) a hotel - Listen to the teacher. lake - Repeat it chorally and then b) trees individually. - Make the sentence for school themselves. c) a river - Practice in pairs. rice paddy - Some pairs practice in front. - Look at the board. - A student to come to the front and choose one of the things. - The rest of the class to guess which thing it is. * St1: What is there near ………? * St2: Is there a park near………? * St1:Yes, there is / No,. - a park - a hotel - a river - a rice paddy - a school. d) a e) a f) a.

(63) there isn’t. IV. Production: (7’) 3-Further practice: - A5, * Write it up - Look at the board. page 64: - Ask students to write 4 - 6 - Listen to the teacher. - a hotel - trees sentenses about their place. - Students to write 4 – 6 - a river - a lake - Do the model. sentenses about their place a school rice + There is a hotel near our - Correct. paddy house. * Homework: (3’) - Ask students to learn by heart - Take notes and memorize -Town and country vocabulary and Simple present - Do as the teacher vocabulary. tense requests. - A5, page 64:There is a - Have them prepare Unit 6 hotel near our house. Lesson 3: Reading a text about - Unit 6: Places - Lesson where Minh lives. 3 :B1 – B3. * Self – evaluation: ... …………………………………………………………………………………………………… …………………………………………………………………………………………………… ……… ... …………………………………………………………………………………………………… …………………………………………………………………………………………………… ……… Week: 12 Period 35 Date of planning: 20/10/2013 Date of teaching:. UNIT 6: PLACES Section: In the city ( B1,2,3 ). A. Objectives: 1.Knowledge: By the end of the lesson, students will be able to understand town vocabulary. - Read the text about Minh and understand where they live and around it. * Vocabulary. - words related to places around the city: hospital, factory, museum, restaurant, bookstore, temple. -review preposition of places: in, on , near. Next to (new word) * Grammar: - review verbs: live, work to talk about people and preposition of time - review : there is a … ; preposition of places: in, on, next to 2. Skills: listening, reading 3. Behavior: B. Teaching aids : - Teacher : pictures, textbook,. tape, cossets - Student : textbook C. Teaching steps: Teacher’s activities I. Warm up: (5’) * Rub out & remember dialogue - Set the scene. - Put “ Play with words” on the board . - Rub out some of the words .. Students’ activities - Practice saying the dialogue. - Remember te rubbed out words and keep practicing it. - Repeat the rubbed out words from memory.. Content on the board Houses and parks, Flowers and trees, Lakes and rivers, We love these..

(64) II. Presentation: (10’)  Translation  Situation  Situation  Translation  Picture  Translation  Situation * What and where - Elicit the vocabulary from the students and write them in the circles. - Get students to repeat the words including the rubbed out words by pointing at the empty circle.. 1-Vocabulary: - Listen to the teacher. - a store :(n) cửa hàng. - Repeat after the teacher. - a restaurant :(n) nhaø haøng. - Notice the main stress - a temple : (n)đền, miếu. pattern. - a hospital :(n) beänh vieän. - Write the new words in - a factory : (n)nhaø maùy. their notebooks. - a museum : (n)nhaø baûo taøng. - a stadium : (n)sân vận động. - Students repeat chorally and remember all the words. - Go to the board and fill in the circles with the right words.. A store. A hospita l. A temple A stadium A factory. * True / Fasle Prediction - Set the scene: Lan is talking to Mai about Minh. - Now, read the statements and guess they are true or fasle. - Ask students to write True/ Fasle in their books.. III. Practice: (20’) - Ask students to read the text and check their prediction. - Ask students to reread the text by themselves. * Lucky numbers - Write the numbers on the board. - Divide class into teams. The teams take turn to choose the numbers. - Tell students that they have to answer the questions .. IV. Prodction: (7’) * Bingo - Put the table on the board. -Ask students to choose any. - Put attention to the teacher: - Read the statements on the board and guess which statements are true and which are fasle. -write T / F in their books.. 1. B1 (page 66) a) Minh lives in the country. b) There are four people in his family. c) Their house is next to the bookstore. d) There is a museum near their house. e) Minh’s mother words in a factory. f) Minh’s father works in a hospital.. - Read the text and check 2- reading: B1, page 66: their prediction. a) F / d) T/ b) T Reread the text by e) F/ c) F / f) F Reading comprehension themselves. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 1d) Minh’s house is next to a - Look at the board. store. - Work in teams. - Take turn to choose the 2 Lucky number. 3b) a restaurant , a bookstore, a numbers. temple - Answer the questions. 4c) His mother works in a hospital. 5 Lucky number. 6e) His father works in a factory. 7a) …… and his family live in the city. - Read the words in the * Answer: table. - Listen to the teacher. a) museum. -Choose any four words. b) bookstore..

(65) four words in a, b, c or d and - Put ticks next to the c) river. copy them into their books. words that they listen to. d) street. - Let students listen to the - Shouts “Bingo”. cassette and correct. * Homework: (3’) - Ask students to learn by heart Take notes and - Town vocabulary. town vocabulary. memorize - B1 – B3. - Have them prepare Unit 6 - - Do as the teacher - Unit 6: Places – IN THE CITY Lesson 4:(B4): Practising suggests. - Lesson 3 : B4. prepositions of place. * Self – evaluation: ... …………………………………………………………………………………………………… ………………………………………………………………………………………………… ... …………………………………………………………………………………………………… …………………………………………………………………………………………………… ……… Week: 12 UNIT 6: PLACES Period : 36 Section: Around the house ( C1 ) Date of planning: 20/10/2013 Date of teaching: A.Objectives: 1.Knowledge: By the end of the lesson, students will be able to use prepositions of place: in front of, behind, to the left / right of to describe the position of a house. *Grammar: review question begin where with: to be *Vocabulary. Preposition of places: behind, in front of, to the left of, to the right of. Words about things around house: trees, flowers, well, mountain. 2. Skills: listening, reading,writing 3. Behavior: B. Teaching aids : - Teacher : pictures, textbook,. tape, cassettes - Student : textbook C. Steps of teaching : Teacher’s activities Students’ activities Content on the board I. Warm up: (5’) - Where do you * Chatting Answer the teacher’s live? - Ask students some questions about questions about their class. - Is there a their class. - Students – Teacher. ………… near / next - Teacher – whole class. to ……? II. Presentation: (10’) - Elicit vocabulary  Situation  Situation  Situation  Visual. - Listen to the teacher. 1-Vocabulary: - Repeat after the teacher. - in front of : phía - Notice the main stress trước. pattern. - behind : phía sau. - Write the new words in - a city : thaønh phoá. their notebooks. - the country : mieàn queâ..

(66) * Matching - Put the Vietnamese translation and English words on the board. -Ask students to match English words with the Vietnamese translation . - Ask students to work in teams.. *Presentation picture. - Set the scene: We are talking about a house. - Point to the things and ask them to tell the names of the things around. - Ask them to read by themselves. - Let some of the students read aloud and give the Vietnamese translation of the words: well, mountain.. III. Practice: (20’) *Picture drill - Run through the pictures. - Hold up the first picture and say the model sentences: +Where are the mountains? + They are behind the house. - Do the same for the seccond picture. - Correct their mistakes.. Group works. - in - Lookl at the board. - Listen to the teacher. - on - Work in teams. - Come to the board and - near match English words with the Vietnamese translation. caïnh. - Listen to the teacher’s explanation. - Tell the names of the things around. Read the text by themselves. - Some of students read the text aloud.. - Look at the pictures. - Listen to the teacher. - Repeat it chorally and then individually. -Make the sentence for themselves. - Practice in pairs. -Some pairs practice in front.. - gaàn - trong -. - next to treân 2- Target language: 2. C1 (page 68) Look at the house. In front of the house, there is a big yard. Behind the house, there are tall trees. Behind the tall trees, there are mountains. To the left of the house, there is a well. To the right of the house, there are flowers. - Well: caùi gieáng Mountain: nuùi 3. Practice: a) mountains d) flowers b) trees e) well c) yard f) house. IV. Production: (7’) 4. Further practice: * Matching a) Which is Ba’s - Ask them to look at the pictures. - Lookl at the pictures. house? - A - Let students listen to the cassette and - Students listen to the b) Which is Lan’s find the right picture. cassette and try to find out house? - B which picture is Ba’s, Lan’s c) Which is Tuan’s or Tuan’s house. house? - B * Homework: (3’) - Ask students to learn by heart - Take notes and memorize - Prepositions of place. - Position of the vocabulary and how to describe the - Do as the teacher house. position of the house. requests. - Unit 6: Places - Have them prepare Unit 6 - Lesson 6: Lesson 6 :C3 – C4. Prepositions of place to describe a street * Self – evaluation:.

(67) ... …………………………………………………………………………………………………… ………………………………………………………………………………………………… ...………………………………………………………………………………………………… Duyệt của BGH Week: 13 Period 37 Date of planning: 07/11/2013 Date of teaching:. Duyệt của tổ trưởng UNIT 6: PLACES Section: Around the house ( C3,4,5 ). A. Objectives: 1.Knowlege: By the end of the lesson, students will be able to use “Where is … / are …?” Questions and answers with town vocabulary and prepositions of place to describe a street. * Grammar . question with “where” * Vocabulary: words related to C3,4,5: between, opposite, photocopy, drugstore, police station, toy store, bookstore 2. Skills: listening, reading. 3. Behavior: live and know their own neighbor B.Teaching aids : - Teacher : pictures, textbook,. tape, cassettes - Student : textbook C. Steps of teaching: Teacher’s activities Students’ activities Content * Warm up (5’) Pair works - C1 (page 68) - Show the picture and tell - Look at the picture. students to ask questiuons - Ask questions and and answer. answer about Thuy’s house. 1. Presentation: (10’) 1-Vocabulary: - gives the pictures and - Listen to the teacher. - the drugstore: hieäu thuoác taây. introduces the situation - Repeat after the - the stoystore: cửa hàng đồ chơi. - introduce the new words teacher. - the movie theater: raïp chieáu phim. - read them - Notice the main - the police station: đồn công an. - calls some Ss to read the stress pattern. new words - Write the new words - the bakery: loø / tieäm baùnh mì. - Between: ở giữa. in their notebooks. - Oposite: đối diện. Rub out and remember - Students repeat + Checking vocabulary: -Point to the Vietnamese chorally and remember translations and rub out all the English words. English words. - Call the English - Get students to call the words and write the English words. English words if there is time. Presentation text. + Target language: - Set the scene: They are - Listen to the - C3 (page 70) talking about their town. teacher’s explanation. +Where is the photocopy store? - Ask students to listen to - Listen to the text + It is next to the bakery. the text about the town. about the town. +Where are the children? - Isolate the model - Answer the + They are in the bookstore. sentences by answering questions. Where is / are the ……………?.

(68) the questions and: - Understand of the It is … / They are ……………... +Where is the photocopy target language in term - Hoûi vò trí. store? of meaning, use and + It is next to the bakery. form by answering the questions. 2. Practice: (20’) - Run through the pictures. - Hold up the first picture and say the model sentences: +Where is the bakery? + It is next to the movie theater. - Do the same for the seccond picture. - Correct their mistakes. Guessing game. - Write the things on the board. - Get a student to come to the front and choose one of the things - Get the rest of the class to guess what time it is. The first student guesses the time correctly comes up to the front, chooses a new time and the game cotinues 3. Production: (7’) - Get students to fill in their real timetable (only the 5 subjects they have learnt in English). - Get them to practice in pairs: + What’s in front of your house? + A rice paddy. - Feedback. * Homework: - Ask students to review vocabulary and Grammar points (Unit4 – Unit6) , to do exercises in the workbook from page 60 to 63. - Have them prepare 45’ Test.. 2. Practice: - Look at the pictures. - Listen to the teacher. - Repeat it chorally and then individually. - Make the sentence for themselves. - Practice in pairs. - Some pairs practice in front. - Look at the board. - A student to come to the front and choose one of the things. - The rest of the class to guess which thing it is. * Student1: It’s next to the movie theater. What is it? * Student2: It’s the police station. * Student1:Yes, That’s right.. - C4 - a - (page 70) a) bakery. d) bookstore. b) movie theater e) toystore c) police station. f) children. - C4 - b - (page 70) 1) It’s opposite the bakery. 2) It’s between the bakery and the drugstore. 3) It’s next to the bakery. 4) It’s opposite the bookstore. 5) It’s next to the movie theater.. 4.Further practice: C5 (page 71) - Fill in their real timetable (only the 5 subjects they have learnt in English). - Practice in pairs. - Tell the teacher what they have asked their partner, e.g.“There is a rice paddy in front of Lan’s house……… -Review vocabulary and Grammar points (Unit1 – Unit3) , to do exercises in the exercise book from page 22 to 25. - Prepare 45’ Test carefully.. Na. .. in fro. .. be -hin d. opp osit e. ..lef t of. righ -t of. Where is / are the …………………………? It is ………………. / They are ……………... - Vocabulary and Grammar points (Unit 4 – Unit 6). - Exercises in the workbook from page 60 to 63. - FORTY-FIVE MINUTE TEST..

(69) * Self – evaluation: …………………………………………………………………………………………………… …………………………………………………………………………………………………… …………………………………………………………………………………………………… Week: 13 The second written test ( Time: 45’) Period: 38 Date of planning: 07/11/2013 Date of teaching: A. Objectives: 1.Knowledge: Check the knowledge which has been learnt to know how well Sts know about the grammar, vocab, structures, understanding, Sts do the test carefully, exactly,and clearly. B. Teaching aids. - Teacher: hand out the photocopies. - Ss: pen……… C.Contents: I-Nghe và viết các số nghe đợc:(2 pts) 1- eleven 2- twenty 3- fifteen 4-thirty 5-fifty 6-twelve 7-twenty two 8-forty three II-Khoanh tròn đáp án đúng mà em chọn (4.0 pts) 1. There …………nine hundred students in the school . A.is B .are C.am D.to be 2. I ………….breakfast at 6.30 . A. have B.has C.having D.to have 3. Do you …………. your face in the morning? A. washes B.washing C. to wash D.wash 4. Minh ………….. to school at 6.40 . A. go B.goes C.going D.to go 5. She ……….her teeth every morning A.brushes B.brush C.to brush D.brushing 6. The toystore is between the restaurant ………the bakery. A.but B. and C.to D.next 7. Lan has math and history ……… Monday . A. to B.at C.in D. on 8. He ……….. breakfast at six . A. having B.have C.to have D. has III.Đọc đoạn văn sau, sau đó đánh (T) vào câu em cho là đúng; (F) vµo c©u em cho lµ sai( 2pts) This is Minh .He is a student .He learns at TanThuan school in TanThuan village .He gets up at six every morning .He leaves his house at six fourteen.The school is near his house .His classes start at seven and end at eleven thirteen. He has lunch at home at twelve o’clock . 1. He gets up at 5 o’clock every morning ………F………… 2. He leaves his house at 6.45 ………F………… 3. The school is near his house ……T…………… 4. He has lunch at school at twelve o’clock ……F…………… IV.Tr¶ lêi c¸c c©u hái sau vÒ b¶n th©n em (Häc sinh tù tr¶ lêi) : ( 2 pts ) 1. Which class are you in ? ..................................................................................................................... 2.What time do you get up ? ..................................................................................................................... 3.What do you do after school ?.

(70) ..................................................................................................................... 4. How many people are there in your family? * Answers: I. Listening 1- eleven 5-fifty. 2- twenty 6-twelve. II. Choose the best answer 1/ B 2/ A 3/ D 4/ B III. Reading 1. F 2. F 3. T 4. F. 5/ A 6/B. 3- fifteen 7-twenty two. 7/D. 4-thirty 8-forty three. 8/D. IV. Writing 1- I am in class 2- I get up at….. 3- I…….. 4- There are……... Week: 13 Period: 39 UNIT 7: YOUR HOUSE Date of planning: 07/11/2013 Section: IS YOUR HOUSE BIG? (A1,2) Date of teaching: A. Objectives: 1.Knowledge:By the end of the lesson, students will be able to understand the details. * Grammar . is is…..?  yes, it is/ no, it isn’t Is there a/an ……?  yes, there is/ no, there isn’t. Are there any …..?  yes, there are/no, there aren’t * Vocabulary: Review: big,small, yard, flowers, tree, lake, river, rice paddy; New words: old, new, beautiful, vegetable garden. 2.Skills: speaking, listening, writing. 3.Behavior: love their house and know decorating for their house. B.Teaching aids : - Teacher : pictures, textbook,. tape, cassette - Student : textbook C.Teaching steps: Teacher’s activities * Warm up: (5’) - Set the scene: Ba is talking about his daily activities . - Have students copy the table. - Get students to guess about Ba’s daily activities by writing the time in figures. - Let them listen to the cassette.. Students’ activities - Listen to the teacher. - Pay attention to the teacher’s explanation. - Students copy the table. - Guess about Ba’s daily activities by writing the time in figures. - Listen to the cassette.. Content on the board Ye s ………… big? …… small? ……a yard? ……a well? …flowers? ………trees?. N o.

(71) I. Presentation: (10’) - Elicit vocabulary  Translation  Visual  Realia. - Listen to the teacher. -Repeat after the teacher. - Notice the main stress pattern. - Write the new words in their notebooks.. * Slap the board - Put the Vietnamese translation on the board. - Call two students of two teams to the front of the class.. - Group works. * Checking vocabulary: - Say the Vietnamese translation . - Run forward and slap the correct words on the board. - Continue until students have slapped all the words.. - Call out one of English words in loud voice. - True / Fasle Prediction - Set the scene: Hoa is talking to Minh about her house. - Now, read the statements and guess they are true or fasle. - Ask students to write True/ Fasle in their books. 2. Practice: (20’) - Ask students to read the text and check their prediction. - Ask students to reread the text by themselves. * Matching - Let some students read the letter aloud. -Ask students to match the questions and answers . - Ask students to work in teams. - Ask them to copy the letter and do the exercise in the notebooks. 3. Production: (7’) - Ask students to change the underlined information to descride their own house and then draw a picture of it as a photo from the main text of the letter.. - Put attention to the teacher: - Read the statements on the board and guess which statements are true and which are fasle. -write T / F in their books.. 1-Vocabulary:. - a garden : khu vườn. - a vegetable : rau. - a photo : bức ảnh.. * A2 (page 72) a) The house is in the country. b) There’s a river near the house. c) There are strees to the left of the house. d) There are two gardends.. - Read the text and check their prediction. - Reread the text by themselves.. 2.A2, page 72: a) T c) F b) F d) T a) Is there a flower garden in front …? -Group work b) Is the house beautiful? - Some read aloud as the c) Is there a flower garden behind teacher asks. …? - Do the exercise, then d) Is the lake to the right of the read aloud. house? - Work in teams. e) Is Nga in the city? A) Yes, it is. - Copy the letter and B) No, it isn’t. write the questions and C) No, she isn’t. answers in the D) Yes, there is. notebooks. E) No, there isn’t. -Students change the underlined information to descride their own house and then draw a picture of it as a photo from the main text of the letter.. * My House There is a flower garden in front of the house. There’s a vegetable garden behind the house. To the left of the house, there’s a lake. To right of the house, there are tall trees. Here is a photo..

(72) * Homework: (3’) - Ask students to learn by - Take notes and - Town vocabulary. heart town vocabulary. memorize - Unit 7: Your House – IS YOUR - Have them prepare Unit 7 - Do as the teacher HOUSE BIG? - Lesson 2 : - Section:( A3,4,5,6,R): suggests. A3,4,5,6,R. Facilities vocabulary with “Is/are there …” * Self – evaluation: …………………………………………………………………………………………………… …………………………………………………………………………………………………… …………………………………………………………………………………………………… Week: 14 Period 40 UNIT 7: YOUR HOUSE Date of planning: 07/11/2013 Section: IS YOUR HOUSE BIG? (A3,4,5,6,R) Date of teaching: A. Objective: 1.Knowledge:By the end of the lesson, students will be able to use facilities vocabulary with “Is there a.... / are there any....?” and short answer to describe the town. : * Grammar .present tense……… * Vocabulary. words related to a3-r 2.Skills: speaking, writing, reading, listening 3.Behavior: enjoy sense around them B.Teaching aids : - Teacher : pictures, textbook,. tape, cassettes - Student : textbook C. Teaching steps: Teacher’s activities * Warm up: (5’) - Listen and Draw - Ask students to pick out a piece of paper. - Ask them to listen to the teacher and draw.. 1. Presentation: (10’) - Elicit vocabulary Translation Visual Situation Visual Situation - What and where - Elicit the vocabulary from the students and write them in the circles. - Get students to repeat the words including the rubbed out words by pointing at the empty. Students’ activities - Students to pick out a piece of paper. - Listen to the teacher and draw. - Make their own pictures and dictate them to a partner. - Listen to the teacher. - Repeat after the teacher. - Notice the main stress pattern. - Write the new words in their notebooks. - Students repeat chorally and remember all the words. - Go to the board and fill in the circles with the right words.. Content on the board “ There’s a house. Behind the house there mountains. To the left of the house there’s a tree. In front of the house there’s a river. To the right of the house a man is driving a bike.”. 1-Vocabulary: - a bank : ngân hàng. - a clinic : phòng khám. - a post office : bưu điện. - a suppermarket : siêu thị. - Shops : cửa hàng..

(73) circle. - Rub out & remember dialogue - Set the scene: Nga is asking Phöông about - Put the dialogue on the board . - Rub out some of the words . - Get students to isolate the model sentence. - Ask students some questions + Is there a hotel near Nga’s house? + Are there any trees near her house?. 2. Practice: (20’) - Run through the pictures. - Hold up the first picture and say the model sentences: +Is there a hotel near your house? + Yes, there is / No, there isn’t. - Do the same for the seccond picture. - Correct their mistakes. 3. Production: (7’) - Show them the pictures. Ask them to choose one of the houses. - Get the rest of the class to guess which house they choose. The first student guesses the house correctly comes up to the front, chooses a new house and the game continues. - Ask them to listen to the cassette and try to find out which house it is.. 2-Target language: - Practice saying the Nam: What is this ? dialogue. Nga: It is a hotel. - Remember te rubbed Nam: What are those? out words and keep Nga: They are trees. practicing it. Nam: Is there a hotel near your - Repeat the rubbed out house? dialogue from memory. Nga: Yes, there is. - Isolate the model Nam: Are there any trees near your sentence. house? - Answer the questions Nga: No, there aren’t. + Yes, there is. - Is there a …………………… ? + No, there aren’t. - Yes, there is / No, there isn’t. - Copy the notes and - Are there any ………………? memorize. - Yes, there are / No, there aren’t. - Dùng để hỏi đoán xem có cái gì đó ở nơi nào đó hay không 3. Practice: A3, page 74 - Look at the pictures. a) hotel - Listen to the teacher. b) flowers - Repeat it chorally and c) bank then individually. d) supermarket - Make the sentences for e) restuarant themselves. f) hospital - Practice in pairs. g) post office - Some pairs practice in h) police station front.. - Students look at the pictures and choose one of the houses the teacher shows . - The rest of the class asks him or her question to find which house he or she chooses. * Are there any trees? / Are they behind the house? / Is it house b? * Yes, it is. - Listen to the cassette and try to find out which house it is. * Homework: (3’) - Take notes and - Ask students to learn by heart memorize facilities vocabulary with “Is - Do homework as the there a… / are there any…?” teacher suggests. and short answer. . - Have them do the exercises in the workbook from page 64 to 65 and prepare Unit 7 Lesson 3:(B1,2,3,R): Reading a. 4. Further practice: A4, page 74 - House a) - House b) - House c) A5, page 75: (House a) There are some mountains behind the house. There are some trees to the right. There’s a lake to the left.. - Facilities vocabulary. - Is there a ……………………………… ? - Yes, there is / No, there isn’t. - Are there any ………………………? - Yes, there are / No, there aren’t..

(74) text about Ba’s and Chi’s house.. - Exercises in the workbook from page 64 to 65. - Unit 7: Your House – TOWN OR COUNTRY? - Lesson 3 : B1,2,3.. * Self – evaluation: …………………………………………………………………………………………………… …………………………………………………………………………………………………… …………………………………………………………………………………………………… ……………………………………………………………………………………………………. Week: 14 Period: 41 Date of planning: 07/11/2013 Date of teaching:. UNIT 7: YOUR HOUSE Section: TOWN OR COUNTRY? (B1,2,3,R). A. Objective: 1.Knowledge: By the end of the lesson, students will be able to understand the differences between town and country. *Grammar .present tense……… *Vocabulary. words related to b 2. Skills: listening, reading, speaking, writing. 3. Behavior: like the place they are living. B.Teaching aids : - Teacher : pictures, textbook,. tape, cassettes - Student : textbook C.Teaching steps: Teacher’s activities * Warm up: (5’) + Hangman - Draw strokes on the board. Each stroke stands for a letter of the word. - The teacher draws a stroke if a student’s guess is not right. - The teacher gives the answer if they lose. 1. Presentation: (10’) - Elicit vocabulary  Translation  Antonym  Translation  Situation  Visual  Synonym. Students’ activities - Students take turn to guess the letters of the words. - Give a letter in the alphabet. - Have to try to guess the word. - Find out the word.. - Listen to the teacher. - Repeat after the teacher. - Notice the main stress pattern. - Write the new words in their notebooks.. - Rub out and remember - Students -Point to the Vietnamese chorally. repeat and. Content on the board _ _ _ _ _ _ (stores) _ _ _ _ (bank) _ _ _ _ _ _ _ (flowers) _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ (supermarket). 1-Vocabulary: - Noisy : oàn aøo. - Quiet : yeân laëng. - an aparment : caên hoä. - a market : chợ. - a zoo : vườn thú. - paddy field = rice paddy: caùnh đồng luùa. * Checking vocabulary:.

(75) translations and rub out remember all the English words. English words. - Get students to call the - Call the English English words. words and write the English words if there is time. 2. Practice: (20’) - Have students look at the - Look at the pictures pictures of Ba’s and Chi’s of Ba’s and Chi’s house (Page 76, 77) in 20 house (Page 76, 77) in seconds and try to remember 20 seconds and try to as many facilities as remember as many possible. facilities as possible. - Divide class into two - Work in groups. groups. Put away the - Put away the pictures and pictures and ask ask students to go to the students to go to the board and write the facilities board and write the they’ve seen from memory. facilities they’ve seen - The group having the most from memory. right English words is the - Congratulate. winner. - Ask students to read the - Read the text and text and check their writing. check their prediction. - Ask students to reread the - Reread the text by text by themselves. themselves. - Matching - Let some students read the letter aloud. -Ask students to match the questions and answers . - Ask students to work in teams. - Ask them to copy the letter and do the exercise in the notebooks. 3. Production: (7’) - Ask students to think of town and the country. - Get them to go to the board and write down their idea. - Give feedback.. * Homework: (3’) - Ask students to learn by heart town and country vocabulary. - Have them prepare Unit 7 Lesson 4:(B2-3):. - Group work - Some read aloud as the teacher asks. - Do the exercise, then read aloud. - Work in teams. - Copy the letter and write the questions and answers in the notebooks. - Students to think of the town and country. - Go to the board and write down their idea.. * B1 (page 76, 77) Ba’s house My name’s Ba. I live in an apartment in town. Near the apartment there is a supermarket, a post office, a bank, a clinic, a market and a zoo. It’s very noisy here. Chi’s house My name’s Chi. I live in a house in the counrty. There aren’t any stores here. There are trees and flowers, a river, a lake and paddy fields. It’s very quiet. Here is a picture. * B1, page 76, 77: *Ba’s house: a supermarket, a post office, a bank, a clinic, a market and a zoo. *Chi’s house: trees and flowers, a river, a lake and paddy fields. a) Does Ba live in town? -Yes, he does. b) Does he live in a house? - No, he doesn’t. c) Is it noisy? – Yes, it is. d) Does Chi live in town? - No, she doesn’t. e) Are there any stores? - No, there aren’t. f) Is it quiet? -Yes, it is. In town In the country … it’s ..it’s quiet..ect noisy. ……………………… …We live ………………………… in apart …there’s a zoo. …there are shop.. - Take notes and memorize - Town and country vocabulary. - Do as the teacher - Unit 7: Your House – IS YOUR suggests. HOUSE BIG? - Lesson 4 : B2-B3..

(76) Integrated skills practice to describe where we live. * Self – evaluation: …………………………………………………………………………………………………… …………………………………………………………………………………………………… …………………………………………………………………………………………………… Week: 14 Period : 42 Date of planning: 10/11/2013 Date of teaching:. CORRECT THE TEST. A. Objectives: - By the end of the period, ps know how to do to improve their knowledge and have plan to revise old grammar. B. Language contents: - Review C. Techniques: - Elicit and guild. D. Teaching aids: - Test sheet E. Procedures: Teacher’s activities 1). Warm up: - How are you to day? - What the date? - Who’s absent?. Ps’ activities - Answer teacher’s questions. 2) Correct the test: - Teacher asks ps to do sentence by - Do as the teacher asks. sentence. - Teacher corrects and explains in - Copy. each sentence. - Review for ps grammar and words.. 4) Consolidation: 5- Home work: - Prepare for unit 12: lesson 1. - At home.. Contents I. Listening 1. 11 2. 20 3. 15 4. 30 5. 50 6. 12 7. 22 8. 43 II. Choose the best answer 1/ B 2/ A 3/ D 4/ B 5/ A 6/ B 7/ D 8/ D III. Reading 1. F 2. F 3. T 4. F IV. Writing 1- I am in class 2- I get up at….. 3- I…….. 4- There are……...

(77) * Self – evaluation: …………………………………………………………………………………………………………… …………………………………………………………………………………………………………… ……………………………………………………………………………………………………………. Week: 15 Period :43 Date of planning: 10/11/2013 Date of teaching:. UNIT 7:. YOUR HOUSE. Section: On the move ( C1,2 ). A. Objectives: 1.Knowledge: By the end of the lesson, students can talk about means of transport. *Grammar .present tense……… *Vocabulary. words related to c1-2 2. Skills: reading, listening, writing, speaking 3. Behavior: describing B. Teaching aids : - Teacher : pictures, textbook,. tape, cossets - Student : textbook C. Teaching steps: Teacher’s activities * Warm up: (5’)Guessing game. - Show them the pictures. Ask them to choose one of the houses. - Get the rest of the class to guess which house they choose. The first student guesses the house correctly comes up to the front, chooses a new house and the game continues. 1. Presentation: (10’) * Elicit vocabulary - Use pictures on page 78 – 79.. *What and where - Elicit the vocabulary from the students and write them in the circles. - Get students to repeat the words including the rubbed. Students’ activities - Students look at the pictures and choose one of the houses the teacher shows . - The rest of the class asks him or her question to find which house he or she chooses. * Are you going to the bank? * No, I’m not. * Yes, I am. - Listen to the teacher. - Repeat after the teacher. - Notice the main stress pattern. - Write the new words in their notebooks.. Content on the board I’m going to ……………………… - factory - museum - post office - stadium. 1-Vocabulary: - by bike : bằng xe đạp - walk : đi bộ - by motorbike : bằng xe máy - by bus : bằng xe buýt. - by car : bằng ôtô - by train : bằng tàu hỏa - by plane : bằng máy bay. :. - Students repeat chorally and remember all the words. - Go to the board and.

(78) out words by pointing at the empty circle. * Dialogue build.. fill in the circles with the right words.. 2-Target language: A5(page 54) Ba: What time do you usually go to - Set the scene. -Answer the school? - Read the dialogue and write teacher’s question. Lan: At 6.30 . few key words on the board - Look at the board Ba: How do you go to school ? to help students remember and listen to the Ba: I go to school by bike . what the two speaker in the teacher carefully. Ba: How does Nga travel to school? dialogue say to each other . - Reproduce the Lan: She travels by motorbike. - Get students to write in the dialogue from the 1. Form missing words on the board. cues. *How do you + V (go / travel)…? - Get students to isolate the - Build the dialogue - I + V (go / travel) + by + ph¬ng tiÖn model sentence. until it is memorized. *How does he/she + V (go / travel)…? - Write in the -He/she + (goes / travels) +by + p.t missing words on the Hỏi ngời nào đó đi bằng phơng tiện nµo board. 2. Practice: (20’) 3.Practice: *Substitution drill - Listen to the C2 on page 78 – 79 (11 picture - Get students to repeat the teacher and repeat cues) question. after the teacher. - Lien / bike - Mrs Lan / plane - Call out phrases to be - Make the change - Thu / motorbike -Mr Ba/ motorbike changed in the question: and repeat the new - Tuan / bus - Miss Hoa / walk +How does Lien go to question. - Hoa / car - Mr Kim / train school? +How does Lien go - Huong / walk - Mrs Dung / car - She goes to schoolby bike to school? - Mr Hai / train - Do the same for the seccond - She goes to picture. schoolby bike - Correct their mistakes. - Practice in pairs. - Some pairs practice in front. 3. Production: (7’) 4.Further practice: - Nought and crosses - Look at the board. - Put the grid on the board. - Work in groups. - Divide class into teams. - One is noughts (O) Mrs Dung Mrs Lan Mr Hai One is noughts (O) and the and the other is other is Crosses (X). Crosses (X). - Two teams choose any - Choose any phrases Lien Thu Tuan things in the boxes and ask in the boxes, ask and questions about what things ask questions about are . where they live : Mr Ba Mr Kim Miss Hoa - The team which has three +How does Lien go noughts or three crosses on a to school? line will win the game. + She goes by bike - Congratulate the winner. * Homework: (3’) - Vocabulary (means of transport). - Ask students to learn by - Take notes and - How do you + V (go / travel)…? heart means of transport memorize - I + V (go / travel) + ph¬ng tiÖn . with “How” question to talk - Do homework as - How does he/she + V (go / travel) about transportation. the teacher suggests. …? - Have them prepare Unit 7 - He/she +Vs/es(goes / travels) + p.t ..

(79) Lesson 6:(C4-C5): Reading a - Unit 7: Your House – ON THE text about Hoang’s daily MOVE - Lesson 6 : C 3-4. routine. * Self – evaluation: ………………………………………………………………………………………………………………… ………………………………………………………………………………………………………………… ………………………………………………………………………………………………………………… Week: 15 Period: 44 Date of planning: 10/11/2013 Date of teaching:. UNIT 7:. YOUR HOUSE. Section: On the move ( C3,4,R ). A. Objectives: 1/Knowledge: By the end of the lesson, students will be able to understand the text about Hoang’s routine. *Grammar: simple present tense *Vocabulary: old words 2/ Skills: reading, writing 3/ Behavior: enjoy reading B. Teaching aids - Teacher: tape, cassette, pictures, textbook - Student:vocabulary C. Steps of teaching: Teacher’s activities * Warm up: (5’) - Find someone who - Put the table on the board. - Get students to get into groups. - Get students to ask each other questions. + T: Do you get up at 5.30? + S(Lan): Yes, I do. - Correct if there are any mistakes. - Feedback. 1. Presentation: (10’) - Set the scene: Hoang is talking about his routine. - Show students the table and ask :+What time does he get up? - Ask students to predict what time Hoang does the following things by answering the questions.. Students’ activities - Work in groups. - Stand up and ask each orther questions. When they find someone who says “Yes” they fill in the name. They can’t fill in someone’s name more than once. - Tell the teacher what they have found, e.g. “ Lan gets up at 5.30……… ”.. Content Find someone who ……gets up at 5.30 ……gets up at 6 ……walks to school ……goes to school by bus ……goes to school by bike. Name Lan. 1 .Pre - reading: - Listen to the teacher. - Read the table and answer the teacher’s questions: + He gets up at 6. -Predict what time Hoang does the following things by answering the questions.. 2. Practice: (20’) - Ask students to read the -. Action He gets up He leaves house School starts School ends He has lunch. What time 6.00 the. 2. While reading: C4, page 80: Read the text and 5.30 11.30.

(80) text and check their predictions. - Ask students to reread the text by themselves. *Lucky numbers - Let some students read the question aloud. -Ask students to choose any numbers and answer the questions . - Ask students to work in teams. - Ask them to write the questions and answers in the notebooks. 3. Production: (7’) - Get students to fill in their real names and what time they do the following things. - Get them to practice in pairs: + What do you get up? + I get up 5.30. - Feedback.. check their predictions. - Reread the text by themselves. - Group work - Some read aloud as the teacher asks. - choose any numbers and answer the questions . - Work in teams. - Write the questions and answers in the notebooks.. 6.30 12.00 7.00 Reading comprehension 2 3 5 6 7. 1 4 8 1e) What time does classes start? 2c) Does he goes to school by car? 3 Lucky number. 4f) What time do they end? 5 Lucky number. 6b) What time does he go to school? 7a) What time does Hoang get up?. - Fill in their real names 3.Post reading: What time? and what time they do Action Name… Name… the following things. ………… ………… - Practice in pairs. get up … … - Tell the teacher what ………… ………… they have asked their go to school … … partner, e.g.“Lan gets up ………… ………… at 5.30. She goes to classes start … … school……… classes ………… ………… end … … go ………… ………… home … … have ………… ………… lunch … …. *Homework: - Town and country vocabulary. - Ask students to learn by - Take notes and - Some homework in the workbook heart town and country memorize (page 66, 67, 68 and 69). vocabulary. - Do homework as the - Unit 8: Out and About – Lesson 1: - Have them do some teacher suggests. WHAT ARE YOU DOING? (A,2,3) homework in the . workbook (page 66, 67, 68 and 69) and prepare Unit 8 Lesson 1: (A1,2,3): Talking about actions happing now. * Self – evaluation: …………………………………………………………………………………………………… …………………………………………………………………………………………………… …………………………………………………………………………………………………… Week: 15 Period: 45 Date of planning: 10/11/2013 Date of teaching:. UNIT 8:. OUT AND ABOUT. Section: WHAT ARE YOU DOING? (A1,2,3 ).

(81) I. Objectives: 1.Knowledge: By the end of the lesson, students can express what is happening at the moment. *Grammar: present progressive *Vocabulary to) play video games (to) drive,(to) ride a bike (to) wait for 2. Skills: reading, writing 3. behavior: enjoys reading II/ Teaching aids - Teacher: tape, cassette, pictures, textbook - Student: vocabulary III. Steps of teaching: Teacher’s activities Students’ activities Content on the board * Warm up: (5’)Bingo - Put the words on the -Look at the board. plane board. - Listen to the teacher. bike -Ask students to choose - Choose any four words. walk any four words and copy - Put ticks next to the words train them into their books. that they listen to. car - Let students listen to the - Shouts “Bingo”. motorbike cassette. 1. Presentation: (10’) 1-Vocabulary: Elicit vocabulary - Listen to the teacher. - to play video games : chôi troø  Visual - Repeat after the teacher. chôi vi- ñeâ -oâ. - Notice the main stress - to ride a bike : đi xe đạp.  Situation pattern. - to drive : laùi xe (oâ toâ).  Mime - Write the new words in - to wait for someone : chờ, đợi ai  Situation their notebooks. đó . - Rub out and remember - Students repeat chorally and -Point to the Vietnamese remember all the English translations and rub out words. English words. - Call the English words and - Get students to call the write the English words if English words. there is time. Presentation text. - Listen to the teacher’s 2- Target language: - Set the scene: They are explanation. -A1 – Top three pictures (page talking about What they - Read the statements. 82) are doing. - Answer the questions. + I am playing video games. - Ask students to listen - Understand of the target + He is playing video games. to the text about the language in term of meaning, + I am riding a bike. town. use and form by answering + She is riding a bike. - Isolate the model the questions: + He plays + I am driving a car. sentences by answering video games. + He is driving a car. the questions and: + No. * Notes: - Ride – riding +What does he do? + Yes. - Drive - driving + Did he play video - Write the form in their games? notebooks. + Is he playing video games? - Ask them to write the form in their notebooks. 2. Practice: (20’). 3.Practice:.

(82) - Run through the pictures. - Hold up the first picture and say the model sentences: +I’m walking to school + She’s waiting for a bus - Do the same for the seccond picture. - Correct their mistakes. 3. Production: (7’) -Nought and crosses - Put the grid on the board. - Divide class into teams. One is noughts (O) and the other is Crosses (X). - Two teams choose any things in the boxes and ask questions about what things are . - The team which has three noughts or three crosses on a line will win the game.. - Look at the pictures. - Listen to the teacher. - Repeat it chorally and then individually. - Make the sentence for themselves. - Practice in pairs. - Some pairs practice in front.. 4.Further practice: - Look at the board. - Work in groups. - One is noughts (O) and the other is Crosses (X). - Choose any phrases in the boxes, ask and ask questions about where they live : +I’m walking to school. + I’m driving a bus. - Congratulate the winner.. walk to school. drive a bus. travel by bus. wait for a train. ride a bike. play a game. go by plane. drive a car. ride a motorbik e. * Homework: (3’) - Ask students to learn by - Take notes and memorize - Vocabulary. heart vocabulary and - Do homework as the - I am + V-ing. How to talk about actions teacher suggests. - He / she + V-ing happening now. - Unit 8: Out and About – - Have them prepare Unit Lesson 2 WHAT ARE YOU 8:Section: (A4,6 conti..) DOING? (A1 conti... Present progressive with “ We / they”. * Self – evaluation: …………………………………………………………………………………………………… …………………………………………………………………………………………………… …………………………………………………………………………………………………… Duyệt của BGH Duyệt của tổ trưởng. Week: 16 Period: 46 Date of planning: 25/11/2013 Date of teaching:. UNIT 8:. OUT AND ABOUT. Section: WHAT ARE YOU DOING? (A4,6,R ). A. Objectives: 1.Knowledge: By the end of the lesson, students will be able to use Present progreesive“Wh” uestions With she/ he / they. *Grammar simple present progressive *Vocabulary Businessman, By bike ,By plane, By car.

(83) 2. Skills: listening, reading, writing 3. Behavior: enjoys listening B.Teaching aids - Teacher: tape, cassette, pictures, textbook - Student:vocabulary C. steps of teaching: Teacher’s activities * Warm up: (5’)Slap the board - Stick the pictures on the board. - Call two students of two teams to the front of the class. - Call out whole sentences: “ He is walking to school” 1.Presentation: (10’) - Set the scene: We are talking about your classmates. - Get them to guess what are they doing. - Point to the pictures and ask them to tell what they are doing: *Student1:He is riding a bike. * Teacher:What is he doing? *Student2:She is driving a car. *Teacher:What is she doing? - Get students isolate the model senteces. - Ask them to write the form in their notebooks. 2. Practice: (20’) - Run through the pictures. - Hold up the first picture and say the model sentences: +What are you doing? + I am learning English. - Do the same for the seccond picture. - Correct their mistakes.. Students’ activities Group works. - Pay attention to the pictures . - Listen to the teacher and their classmates. - Run forward and slap the correct words on the board. - Continue until students have slapped all the picturess.. Content on the board. - Listen to the teacher - Students guess what they are doing. - Look at the pictures and tell what their classmates are doing. *Student1: He is riding a bike. - Repeat after the teacher’s question. - Students isolate the model senteces. - Memorize and write the form in their notebooks.. 1- Presentation: + What is he doing? + He is riding a bike. + What is she doing?. + She is driving a car . + What are they doing?. + They are playing video games. + What are you doing? + I am studying English. - What is he / she doing? - He / She is + động từ thêm ing - What are you / they doing? - I am / They are + V- “ ing”. 2- Practice: A3-4, page 83, - Look at the pictures. 84 - Listen to the teacher. - A3, page 83: - Repeat it chorally and then a) learn English c) individually. drive a car - Make the sentence for b) ride a bike d) themselves. wait for a bus - Practice in pairs. - A4, page 84: - Some pairs practice in front ( a) ride a bike d) ride a A4 P. 84 a – f ) motorbike b) drive a car e) wait for a bus c) walk to school f) wait for a train..

(84) 3. Production: (7’) 3- Further practice: - Have students read all the - Read all the three parts a, b, 2. A6, page 85: three parts a, b, and c. and c. a) Mr. Ha is a businessman. - Ask them to make - Make questions with question He is going to Ha Noi. questions with question words: Who, What, Where and b) Miss Hoa is a teacher. She words: Who, What, Where How as in the examples. is going to schol. and How as in the examples. - Ask questions. c) Mr. Tuan and Mrs. Vui -Correct if there are any - Work in pairs. are doctors. They are going mistakes to the hospital. * Homework: (3’) - Ask students to learn by - What is he / she doing? heart Present progressive - He / She is + động từ thêm “WH” question with He /she - Take notes and memorize “ ing” . / they. - Do homework as requested. - What are you / they doing? - Have them do some - I am / They are + động từ exercies in the workbook thêm “ ing” from page 70 to 71 and - Exercies in the workbook prepare Unit 8 - Lesson 4: from page 70 to 71. (B1): Reading a story about a - Unit 8: Out And About – truck driver to understand the A TRUCK DRIVER - Lesson main ideas and details. 4 : B1. * Self – evaluation: …………………………………………………………………………………………………… …………………………………………………………………………………………………… …………………………………………………………………………………………………… Week: 16 Period: 47 Date of planning: 25/11/2013 Date of teaching:. UNIT 8:. OUT AND ABOUT. Section: A TRUCK DRIVER ( B1). A. Objectives: 1.Knowledge: By the end of the lesson, students will be able to understand the main ideas and details. *Grammar simple present progressive *Vocabulary .a truck diver’s farmer.(to)load(to)unload. a food stall 2. Skills: listening, reading, writing 3. Behavior: enjoys reading B.Teaching aids 1/ teacher: tape, cassette, pictures, textbook 2/student:vocabulary C. steps of teaching: Teacher’s activities * Warm up: (5’) - Nought and crosses - Put the grid on the board. - Divide class into teams. One is noughts (O) and the other is Crosses (X). - Two teams choose any things in the boxes and. Students’ activities - Look at the board. - Work in groups. - One is noughts (O) and the other is Crosses (X). - Choose any phrases in the boxes, ask and ask questions about where. Content on the board He / drive a car. They/ wait for a bus. Hoa / walk to school. I / learn English. Lan / ride a bike She / wait for a train.

(85) ask questions about what things are . - The team which has three noughts or three crosses on a line will win the game. 1. Presentation: (10’) - Present vocabs: -Picture -Picture -Picture -Picture -Picture - Matching - Put the Vietnamese translation and English words on the board. -Ask students to match English words with the Vietnamese translation . - Ask students to work in teams. - Ordering statements prediction - Give the posters of statements on the board. - Get students to work in pairs to put the statements in correct order by numbering the statements from 1 to 6. 2. Practice: (20’) - Ask students to read the text about Mr Quang and check their predictions. - Comprehension Questions - Get students to work in pairs to answer the questions on page 87. - Give feedback and ask students to write the answers on the board. - Have students practice asking and answering the questions in open pairs and then close pairs. 3. Production: (7’) -Role play - Ask students to work in pairs to practice asking. they live : + Where do you live? + I live in / on / near / next to… Congratulate the winner.. - Group works. - Lookl at the board. - Listen to the teacher. - Work in teams. - Come to the board and match English words with the Vietnamese translation.. They / ride a motorbike. - Read the text about Mr Quang and check their predictions. - Students to work in pairs to answer the questions on page 87. - Students write the answers on the board. Practice asking answering the questions in open pairs and then close pairs.. Ba/ travel by bike. 1-Vocabulary: a truck driver a farmer (to) load (v) (to) unload (v) a food stall (to) arrive at (v). Actions - Read the statements on the board. - Work in pairs. - Put the statemants in correct order numbering the them from 1 to 6.. Nam/ go to Ha Noi. thin k. read. going to Ha Noi 4 meeting the farmer 2 having breakfast 6 going to a farm 1 loading vegtables 3 in.. unloading the truck 5 2- While reading: B1, page 86: 4 - 2 - 6 - 1 - 3 - 5 3. Comprehension questions a) What does Mr. Quang do? b) Where is he going at five in the morning? c) Who is waiting for him? d) Where is he taking the vegetables? e) What is he doing at seven o’clock? f) Where is he eating?. 3-Post reading: B2, page 87 - Lan: What are you doing? - Students to work in - Ba: I’m doing my homework. pairs to practice asking - Lan: Are you doing math?.

(86) and answering . One and answering . One - Ba: Yes, I am. student plays the role of student plays the role of - Lan: Are you copying Nam’s work? Lan and anotherplay the Lan and anotherplay the - Ba: No, I am not. I’m correcting it. role of Ba. role of Ba. - Lan: Is Tuan working? Call some pairs some pairs - Ba: No, he isn’t. demonstrate before the demonstrate before the - Lan: Is he playing soccer? class. class. - Ba: Yes, he is. - Give feedback and - Put attention to the - ……… ……… ……… ……… correct ( their teacher. ……… ……… pronunciation / - Students practice the intonation). dialogue in pairs. - Ask them to work in pairs to practice the dialogue. * Homework: (3’) - Vocabulary. - Ask students to learn by - Take notes and - Mr. Quang’s daily life. heart vocabulary and memorize - Unit 8: Out And About – A TRUCK write about Mr.Quang’s - Do as the teacher DRIVER daily life.. suggests. - Have them prepare Unit 8 - Lesson 5:(B2,R): * Self – evaluation: …………………………………………………………………………………………………… …………………………………………………………………………………………………… …………………………………………………………………………………………………… Week 16 Perod 48 Date of planning: 25/11/2013 Date of teaching:. Unit 8 Out and About Section: B,2,R. A. objectives: 1/Knowledge: By the lesson, Ss will be able to read a picture story about a truck driver *Grammar simple present progressive *Vocabulary .a truck diver’s farmer.(to)load(to)unload. a food stall 2/ Skills: listening, reading, writing 3/ behavior: enjoys reading B. Teaching aids - Teacher: tape, cassette, pictures, textbook - Students: textbook, vocabulary C. Steps of teaching: 1/ Class order: (2’) - Greetings 2/ Review: (5’) -T: - calls some Ss to go to the board to the teacher check up - Ss: - go to the board to the teacher check up 3/ New-lesson: (30’) Teacher’s works. Student’s works. -ask Ss look at the pictures -look at the pictures -present the new words. contents B2 listen and read…… a truck diver.a farmer. (to)load(to)unload.a food.

(87) - teaches them to read new words - plays the tape -read about Mr Quang -Guides to read the text in pairs - checks them - asks them to answer the questions. - calls some pairs to practice in pairs -correct. -copy and read -listen and read. stall questions on page 87. - listen to the tape -listen to the teacher - in pairs - notice -listen and try to answer the questions - practice in pairs -listen note. - Explains them -ask Ss listen to the tape -Guides to read the text again and answer the questions -correct - asks them to write part Remember into their notebook. -listen and copy - listen to the tape - practice reading aloud. * Remember: listen and repeat……… On page87 -remember on page85. - notice - write carefully. 4/ Consolidations: (5’) - T: asks Ss to read part the text again - Ss: practice reading 5/ Home work: (3’) - Learn by heart new words - Prepare new lesson at home U8: C1,2 * Self – evaluation: Week: 17 Period: 49 Date of planning: 25/11/2013 Date of teaching:. Unit 8: OUT AND ABOUT Section: C1,2 - ROAD SIGNS. A. Objectives: 1. Knowledge: By the end of the lesson, students will be able to use “can / can’t” statements. *Grammar modals verbs can, can’t ………… *Vocabulary .A policeman , park, Difficult , turn left/ right, sign straight, One-way 2. Skills: listening, reading, writing 3. behavior: enjoys reading, listening B. Teaching aids: - Teacher: Poster and pictures - Students: textbook…….. C. Steps of teaching: Teacher’s activities * Warm up: (5’). Students’ activities. Content on the board Lan . Ba .

(88) - Mapped dialogue - Put the dialogue on the board which is only words. The words are cues. - Model the dialogue. - Run through the cues like a drill with the whole class.. - Look at the board and listen to the teacher. - Repeat after the teacher. - Practice the dialogue in pair . - Some pairs practice in front. - Rewrite the dialogue .. 1. Presentation: (10’) - Elicit vocabulary  Visual  Translation  Visual  Situation  Translation  Antonym  Mime - Rub out and remember -Point to the Vietnamese translations and rub out English words. - Get students to call the English words.. 1-Vocabulary: - a policeman. - Listen to the teacher. - difficul - Repeat after the - a sign : teacher. - one-way - Notice the main stress - to park : pattern. - turn letf / right - Write the new words in - go straight their notebooks. Students repeat chorally and remember all the English words. - Call the English words and write the English words if there is time. 2 -C1 – Road signs (page 89) * Comprehension Questions - Listen to the teacher’s + What does Hoan do? explanation. + Is his job difficul? - Read the statements. + What does this sign mean? - Answer the questions. + What does this sign mean? - Understand of the - You can park here. target language in term - You can’t park here of meaning, use and form by pointing to You can / can’t + Vthe signs. - Write the form in their notebooks.. - Presentation text. - Set the scene: You are going to read a text about Hoan. - Ask students to read the text and answer the questions. - Isolate the model sentences by pointing to the signs: -“You can park here” -“You can’t park here” - Ask them to write the form in their notebooks. 2. Practice: (20’) - Picture drill - Run through the pictures. - Hold up the first picture and say the model sentences: +Can you turn left ? + No. You can’t turn left. - Do the same for the seccond picture. - Correct their mistakes. 3. Production: (7’). - Look at the pictures. - Listen to the teacher. - Repeat it chorally and then individually. - Make the sentence for themselves. - Practice in pairs. - Some pairs practice in front.. -What/you/do ? -you/do/math ? -you/copy/Na.? What/Tuan/do? -Nga & Huong/ work?. do/homework. Yes No play soccer No. 3. Practice: A3, page 74 a) turn left b) turn right c) park here d) ride a motorbike e) park here. 4.Further practice:.

(89) - Write it up - Let students look at the signs and complete the sentences with “can” or “can’t” and write in the notebook. - Do the model. * Homework: (3’) - Ask students to learn by heart traffic vocabulary and can / can’t statements. - Have them prepare Unit 8 - Lesson 6:(C3 – C4): Must / musn’t statements. * Self – evaluation:. - Look at the signs. 2. C2, page 89,90: - Listen to the teacher. a) You ……………… turn left. Complete the b) You ……………… turn right. sentences with “can” or c) You ……………… go ahead. “can’t” and write in the d) You ……………… ride a motorbike. notebook. - Take notes and - Traffic vocabulary. memorize - Can / can’t statements. - Do as the teacher - Unit 8: Out And About – ROAD suggests. SIGNS - Lesson 5 : C3 - C4.. …………………………………………………………………………………………………………… …………………………………………………………………………………………………………… ……………………………………………………………………………………………………………. Week: 17 Period: 50 Date of planning: 25/11/2013 Date of teaching:. Unit 8: OUT AND ABOUT Section: C3,4 - ROAD SIGNS. A. Objectives: 1.Knowledge: By the end of the lesson, students will be able to use “Must / musn’t” for obligation or prohibition. *Grammarmodals verbs ,must, mustn’t *Vocabulary Dangerous slow down accident go fast, intersection (to) warn us 2.Skills: listening, reading, writing 3.Behavior: enjoy reading, listening B. Teaching aids: - Teacher: tape, casset, pictures, textbook - Student:vocabulary C. Steps of teaching: Teacher’s activities * Warm up: (5’) - Word Square - Write the word of the square on the board. - Tell the students what the topic is and how many hidden words are there. - Get the students to come to the board and circle any words they can see. - Get them to put the word into a present progressive statement and write it on the board.. Students’ activities. Content on the board. - Look at the word of the square on the board. - Listen to the teacher and answer the teacher questions. + There are 19 hidden workds - Come to the board and circle any words they can see. - Put the word into a present progressive statement and write it on the board.. R O A D S I G N D W K O R X H I S A A C C I D E N T N R U C D R L O R G N R A E I P T A E S T R A V E L I R T U S L E F T G O O R I G H T O H U P N G O F A S T S : road sign , travel, left, right…… : stop, turn, car, ride, go, drive, stra.. : truck.

(90) giuùp chuùng ta. 1. Presentation: (10’) - Elicit vocabulary Situation Example Visual Situation Antonym Translation Situation - Slap the board - Put the Vietnamese translation on the board. - Call two students of two teams to the front of the class. - Call out one of English words in loud voice.. 2. Practice: (20’) - Pre – questions - Give students two questions and ask them to discuss with their partners to predict the answers. - Ask students to read the text on page 90 and check their predictions. -Mention the verb “must” and “musn’t”. - Get students to work in pairs to answer the questions about the signs :+What must we do ? + What musn’t we do? 3. Production: (7’) - Ordering pictures - Ask students to look at the pictures in C4 on page 91. - Let students listen to the cassette and put the pictuers in correct order by numbering them. * Homework: (3’) - Ask students to learn by. - Listen to the teacher. - Repeat after the teacher. - Notice the main stress pattern. - Write the new words in their notebooks.. 1-Vocabulary: - dangerous (adj) : nguy hiÓm. - an accident : tai nan. - an intersection : giao lộ . - to slow down : giảm tốc độ. - to go fast : đi nhanh. - to warn us : cảnh báo chúng ta. - to help us : giúp chúng ta.. Group works. đi nhanh - Say the Vietnamese translation . - Run forward and slap the correct words on the giúp chúng ta board. - Continue until students have slapped giao loä all the words.. - Read the two questions and discuss with their partners to predict the answers. - Read the text and check their predictions. - Take notes and memorize - Try to ask more questions about road signs to make sure that everybody in class understand what to do when seeing the road signs - Look at the road signs on page 91. - Students listen to the cassette and put the pictures in correct order by numbering them.. - Take notes and memorize. giao lộ. tai nạn.. nguy hiểm. 1) What must we do when there is a intersection ahead? 2) What musn’t we do when the sign says “Stop”? 2-While reading: 1) We must slow down. 2) We musn’t go straight ahead. Form: Must / musn’t + V- ( Vinf ). 3-Post reading: C4 , page 91 Road No. Road signs signs a)Slow 4 e)X do. park… b)Turn 6 f)X.motbik lef. c)X turn 1 g)enter.ro. ri. d) Stop 2 h) P…car. - Traffic vocabulary. - Can (not) / must (not).. No. 8 7 5 3.

(91) heart vocabulary and “Can (not) / must (not)” . - Have them do some exercies in the workbook from page 73 to 74 and prepare Unit 8 - Lesson 7: GRAMMAR PRACTICE. - Do homework as the teacher requested.. - Exercies in the workbook from page 73 to 74. - Unit 8: Out And About – A TRUCK DRIVER - Lesson 7 : GRAMMAR PRACTICE. (Lesson1 – 6) * Self – evaluation: …………………………………………………………………………………………………………… …………………………………………………………………………………………………………… ……………………………………………………………………………………………………………. Week: 17 Period: 51 Date of planning: 25/11/2013 Date of teaching:. UNIT 8: Section:. OUT AND ABOUT GRAMMAR PRACTICE. A. Objectives: 1.Knowledge: By the end of the lesson, students will be able to use grammar points fluently. * Grammar .adjectives, question words, present tense……… *Vocabulary. words related to grammar practice 2.Skills: listening, reading, writing 3.Behavior: B. Teaching aids: - Teacher: lesson plan, textbook…….. - Students: textbook……. C. Teaching steps: Teacher’s activities I-Warm up: (5’) - Bingo - Put the table on the board. -Ask students to choose any five words and copy them into their books. - Let students listen to the teacher. II-New lesson: (32’) - Chain game - Write the phrases on the board. - Ask students to get into groups of four or five. - Do the model. - Lucky numbers - Write the numbers on the board. - Divide class into teams. The. Students’ activities -Look at the board. - Listen to the teacher. - Choose any five words. - Put ticks next to the words that they listen to. - Shouts “Bingo”. - Look at the board - Get into groups of four or five. - Listen to the teacher. - Play games. - Look at the board. - Work in teams. - Take turn to choose the numbers.. Content on the board Wait, turn left, load, walk, travel, train, car, turn right, get, go straight, must, warn, intersection, stop, bike. 1-Present progressive with I, he, she: -S1: I’m watching TV. - S2: She’s watching TV and I’m playing video games *Present progressive with all person: 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 1. c) is / watching 6. Lucky number 2. a) is / riding 7. e) is /listening.

(92) teams take turn to choose the numbers. - Tell students that they have to answer the questions . - Matching - Let some students read the item aloud. -Ask students to match the item in column A with the item in column B . - Ask students to work in teams. - Ask them to do the exercise 3 in the notebooks. - Gap fill Get students to fill in the blank with the correct form of the verbs in brackets : Present simple or Present progressive. - Answer given - Show students the statements. - Let students ask questions. - Ask them to work in pairs -Correct if there are any mistakes III. Production: (5’) - Nought and crosses - Put the grid on the board. - Divide class into teams. One is noughts (O) and the other is Crosses (X). - Two teams choose any things in the boxes and ask questions about what things are . - The team which has three noughts or three crosses on a line will win the game.. - Answer the questions by looking at the picture.. 3. Lucky number 8.Lucky number 4. d) are / playing 9. g) is / going 5. b) are / witing. Group work 2-Preposition of place (3) : - Some read aloud as A B the teacher asks. 1.A girl is ............ a. to the left of - Do the exercise, then 2.A boy is waiting b. in read aloud. 3…… mountains …c. to the right of - Work in teams. 4.some house……… d. in front of - Do the exercise 3 in 5…… some trees… e. opposite the notebooks. 6……… atruck…… f. behind Answers : 1/b; 2/d; 3/f; 4e; 5c; 6/a Fill in the blank with the correct form of the verbs in brackets : Present simple or Present progressive. - Look at the board. - Read the statements. - Ask questions. - Work in pairs.. - Look at the board. - Work in groups. - One is noughts (O) and the other is Crosses (X). - Choose any phrases in the boxes, ask and ask questions about where they live : + What does Sign “i” mean? + You must slow down - Congratulate the winner. * Homework: (3’) - Review vocabulary - Ask students to review and Grammar points vocabulary and Grammar (Unit1 – Unit8) and points (Unit1 – Unit8) and exercises in the exercises in the exercise book exercise book from from Unit 1 to Unit 8 . Unit 1 to Unit 8 . - Have them prepare - Prepare REVISION. REVISION.. *Present simple and Present progressive (5) : a.play/are playing.d.walk/am walking b.rides/is riding. e.drives/is driving. c.go/are going. 3-Question words (4) : a. She is going to the store. b. Nga is waiting for Lan. c. She is carrying a bag. d. It is twelve o’clock. 4- Must and mustn’t – Can and can’t :. a STOP. b. c. h. i 20 Km. d. g P. f. e. - Vocabulary and Grammar points (Unit1 – Unit8). - Exercises in the exercise book from Unit 1 to Unit 8. - REVISION.

(93) * Self – evaluation: …………………………………………………………………………………………………………… …………………………………………………………………………………………………………… ……………………………………………………………………………………………………………. Week: 18. Duyệt của BGH. ÔN TẬP ĐỀ CƯƠNG DO PGD RA. Duyệt của tổ trưởng. The Simple present tense I-Formular (Công thức) a. Ordinary verbs (động từ thường) * Affirmative (thể xác định) I, you, we, they + V(inf)... He , she, it + V(s/es)..... -Thêm “ES” khi động từ tận cùng là “O” (go → goes), “SS” (miss→ misses), “CH” (watch→ watches), “X” (fix→fixes). - Động từ tận cùng là “Y” ( trước Y là một phụ âm): Y→ I + ES Ex: Study→ studies, carry → carriesv nhưng play→ plays * Negative (thể phủ định) I, you, we, they + don’t + V(inf)..... He, she, it + doesn’t + V(inf).... * Interrogative ( thể nghi vấn) Do + I, you, we, they + V(inf)...... ? Does + he , she, it + V(inf)..... ? b. “to be” - Afirmative I + am You, we, they + are He, she, it + is.

(94) - Negative I + am not You, we, they + are not (aren’t ) He, she , it + is not (isn’t) - Interrogative Am + I ... ? Are + you, we, they.... ? Is + he, she , it ... ? c. “ to have” I, you, we, they + have He, she, it + has II-Use (cách dùng) a. Một hành động lặp đi, lặp lại, một thói quen ở hiện tại. Thường đi với: alway, usually, sometimes/ at times, seldom(ít khi), rarely ( hiếm khi), once, twice/three times......... a week/ a month.... every/ month/ year..... Ex1: Lan goes to school by bike. Ex2: They are usually at home on Sundays. b. Một sự thật, một chân lý Ex1: I live in ThaiThuy III- Practice : Supply the correct forms of the verbs: 1. Our house ___________ (have) a small yard. 2. Lan ___________ (eat) her lunch at school. 3. Nam’s sister ___________ (work) in a factory. 4. There ___________ (be) a store near my house. 5. Thu and Vui ___________ (play) games after school. 6. They ___________ (work) in a hospital. 7. There ___________ (be) many trees and flowers in the park. 8. She ___________ (go) to bed at ten o’clock. 9. ___________ Nam’s mother (work) ___________ in a factory? 10. ___________ you (go) ___________ to school every day? 11. It ___________ (be) 12 o’clock now. 12. Minh ___________ (live) in the city with his sister. 13. We ___________ (not go) to school on Sundays. 14. I ___________ (not be) a teacher. 15. She ___________ (not brush) her teeth after meal. 16. That school __________ thirty- five classes. (have) 17. __________ there a river near your house?(be) 18. Nam __________ Literature on Friday?(not have) 19. __________ you __________ your face in the morning?(wash) 20. My mom __________ up at six.(not get) 21. __________ he __________ soccer in the afternoon?(play) 22. Does she__________ watch television in the evening?(watch) 25. Every day, Minh __________ his face.(wash) 26. We ___________ our lunch at school (eat) 27. Minh and Nga ___________ their homework in the evening. (do) 28. She ___________ in a house near a lake.( live) 29. I ___________ television every night.(watch) 30. My mother ___________ in a bookstore.(work) 31. Mai ___________ a shower every morning.(take) 32. Nam ___________ English on Monday.(have) 33. She ___________ her teeth after meals. (brush).

(95) 34. Her brother and sister ___________ sports after lunch.(play) 35. ___________ Nga ___________ T.V every night ( watch) 36. She ___________ to shool at 6.30 every day.(go) 37. What ___________ they ___________ after school?(play) The present progressive tense. I-Formular (Công thức). I We/you/they She/he/it. am are is. + (not) + V-ing. Am Are Is. I We/you/they She/he/it. + V-ing........?. II-Use a. Một hành động đang diễn ra tại thời điểm nói. Thường đi với : now, at the moment, at present, look !, listen ! , Oh! Ex1: Look ! she (come).....→ Look ! She is coming. Ex2: What........ they (do)........ now ? → What are they doing now ? b. Một hành động diễn ra xung quanh thời điểm nói nhưng không nhất thiết đang diễn ra ngay lúc nói. Ex: I am writing a book c. Một hành động diễn ra trong một tương lai gần. Ex: They are going to the cinema tomorrow d. Hai hành động diễn ra song song tại thời điểm nói Ex: Our parents are at home now. My father is reading a newspaper while my mother is cooking. b- exercises A / Multiple choice: 1. Miss Lien is waiting (on/ for / at) the bus. 2. How many school girls (is/ am/ are) there in your class? 3. How (does/ do /is ) Mr Ba travel to Ho Chi Minh City ? 4. My mother gets ( at/ up / on ) very early every day. 5. There ( are/ am/ is ) a lake near my house . 6. The children ( plays/ playing/ play ) soccer in the garden every afternoon. 7. My sister always ( brush/ brushes/ brushing ) her teeth after dinner. 8. My brother ( has/ have/ are ) two children . 9. Little John is ( plays/ play/ playing ) with his toy car. 10. You ( must/ can/ canot ) go into " One way" street. 11. What time ( do/ does/ is ) your work start ? 12. My brother and I (watch/ watches/ watching) TV every evening. 13. His class is on the (three/ third/ thirdth) floor. 14. A paddy field is a rice ( garden/ yard / paddy). 15. This is ( he/ you/ her) new classmate. 16. There is a well ( next/ behind/ to the left) Minh's house. 17. Mr. Smith goes to work (in/ by/ on) bus. 18. which (class/ grade/ chool) are you in? - 7A.

(96) 19. What time do you (get/ has/ have) breakfast? 20. Where do you ( get/ live/ go) - in HaNoi. 21. I usually go to bed (at/ on/ in) 10 o'clock. 22. ( Are/ Does/ Is) your school big or small? 23. I go to school at (six forty-five/ a quater to seven/ both are correct). 24. It is (Nam/ Nam's/ Nams') ruler. 25. Ha is a student. She is (of/ on/ in) grade 6,class6C. 26. We have literature (on/ in/ at) Monday and Wednesday. 27. Do you like music? ( Yes, I do / Yes,I does / No, I am not). 28. ( What/ How/ When) do you do every morning? 29. (Which/ where/ When) school do you go to? 30. She (finish/ finishes/ finishs) her homework at 11 o'clock. 31. ( How many/ How much/ How) floors does it have? 32. Her house is between a bookshop (and/ of/ with) a restaurant. 33. ( Is/ Has/ Does) she live in a big city? -Yes, she does. 34. ( What/ Which/ Where) is your school? - On Quang Trung Street. 35. Is there a bookstore near here? Yes, (there are/ it is/ there is). 36. My father (work/ to work/ works) in a hospital. 37. Hoa is ( rides/ riding/ driving) her bike to school. 38. The lights are red. You ( can/ must/ can't) stop. 39. Where's Tam going? - He is going (from/ to/ at) work. 40. The sign says"No turn left".We (can/ must/ mustn't) turn left. 41. Are there ( some/ any/ a ) trees near your house? 42. ( How/ What/ Who) does he do? - He's a teacher. 43. We are ( at/ on/ in) our living room. 44. He is driving a truck. He’s a truck ( driver / rider / teacher / engineer ) 45. He lives in the country. It’s very ( small / big / quiet / old ) there. B/ Verb form : 1. Ba and I ( be).......................................students. 2. Lan ( not play) .....................................games after school. 3. My brother ( live).................................in Ho Chi Minh City. 4. We (listen)........................................to music now. 5. My father always ( get )................................up at six. 6. There (be).................................twenty classrooms in his school. 7. Our school ( have).............................. a big yard. 8. Where (be)......................... your father now? He (watch)...........................TV in his room. 9. He isn't in his room. He (play)..................................in the garden. 10. They ( play)................................volleyball every afternoon. 11. Listen! Mai (sing)................................ 12. We (do)........................... our homework now. 13. I (be) ............................in grade 6. 14. What your sister ( do ).................................? She is reading. 15. Your mother (go)................................ to work by bus? C/ Make questions for the following answers : 01. His mother is a nurse. => What does his mother do ? 02. I get up at six . =>...................................................................................? 03. My mother works in a hospital. => ......................................................................? 04. She travels to work by car. => .......................................................................? 05. There are twenty classrooms in my school. =>.....................................................? 06. We live in the country. => .................................................................................? 07. I'm reading a newspaper. =>...............................................................................? 08. Mrs. Lien has three children. =>..........................................................................?.

(97) 09. He has lunch at eleven. =>...............................................................................? 10. We go to Le Loi school. => ..............................................................................? 11. They play soccer after school. =>........................................................................? 12. Yes, my school is big. => ...............................................................................? 13. Her school is in the village. =>............................................................................? 14. No,I don't. I don't play volleyball . =>..................................................................? 15. M-A-I . =>........................................................................................................? 16. We have History on Thursday. =>.......................................................................? 17. Today we have English and Geography. => ........................................................? 18. I live on Hung Vuong street. = > ......................................................................... ? 19. They are flowers . => .......................................................................................... ? 20. I’m in grde six. => .......................................................................................... ? D/ REWRITE : 01. There are many flowers in our garden. Our garden................................................................................. 02. Tom drives to work every morning. Tom travels.............................................................................. 03. The garden is behind Nam's classroom. Nam's classroom .................................................................... 04. Her name is Lan. She................................................................. 05. The school is small. It is............................................................... 06. Does your class have forty students? Are .........................................................................................................? 07. He goes to work at seven fifteen. He goes to work at a ............................................................................... 08. The drugstore is to the right of the bakery. The bakery.............................................................................................. 09. My sister goes to school on foot. My sister.................................................................................................. 10. Trung is Mr. Binh'son. Mr. Binh........................................................ 11. My house is not far from the zoo. The zoo.................................................. 12. I go to school by bike . I ride....................................................................... 13. Ba is Ha's brother. Ha is....................................................................... E/ WRITE COMPLETE SENTENCES , USING THE CUE WORDS : 01. What/ Lan/ do/ after school? ..................................................................................... 02. She/ watch/ TV/ now. ............................................................................................. 03. We/ live/ house/ near/ river. ..................................................................................... 04. That/ your book? ..................................................................................................... 05. What/ be/ front/ your house? .................................................................................. 06. There/ lake/ next/ my house. .................................................................................. 07. What time/ Mai/ often/ leave/ her house? ............................................................ 08. You/ go/ school/ bus/ every day? .......................................................................... 09.There/ many/ road signs/ our street. ..................................................................... 10. How / you / go / school ? .............................................................................. F/ ODD ONE OUT : 01. near read teacher 02. right opposite city 03. movie hotel old 04. behind police children 05. temple museum restaurant 06. mountain house country 07. paddy game day 08. late lake small.

(98) 09. school door stool room 10. family thirty my many 11.table eraser lamp bookcase 12. sister window living nine 13. student desk bench television 14. photo motorbike home work 15. eat breakfast read teacher 16. lake , river , factory , well. 17. beautiful , drugstore , bakery , bookstore. 18. store , museum , friend , hospital . 19. near , opposite , between , temple . 20. small , big , student , fine. 21. third , twelve , eleven , nine. 22. teeth , face , breakfast , brush . 23. nurse , doctor , engineer , friend. 24. name , family , class , open. 25. school , teacher , house , store . ……………………………………………………………………………………….

(99) Week: 20 Period: 55 Date of planning: /12/2013 Date of teaching:. UNIT 9:. THE BODY. Section: PARTS OF THE BODY (A1,2). A. Objectives: 1. Knowledge: By the end of the lesson, students will be able to talk about parts of body. * Grammar: present simple tense * Vocabulary : haed, arm, feet, hands, shoulders, toes, fingers……….. 2. Skills: listening, reading, writing 3. behavior: enjoys speaking, reading, writing, listening B. Teaching aids 1/ Teacher:tape, cassette, pictures, textbook 2/ Student:vocabulary C. Steps of teaching: Teacher’s activities Students’ activities * Warm up: (5’) Chatting Ask students some Answer the teacher’s questions about them. questions about themselves. - Teacher – whole class. - Students – Teacher.. Content on the board - Which class are you in? - Where do you live? - Is there a rice paddy near your house?. 1. Presentation: (10’) * Elicit vocabulary - Use the picture to introduce parts of the body. - Say new words as pointing to the picture and ask students to repeat.. 1-Vocabulary: - a head : đầu. - Listen to the teacher. - a hand : baøn tay. - Repeat after the teacher. - a shoulder(s) : vai. - Notice the main stress pattern. - a finger : ngoùn tay. - Write the new words in their - a foot : baøn chaân notebooks. - a leg : chaân - a chest : ngực. * Rub out and remember -Point to the Vietnamese translations and rub out English words. - Get students to call the English words.. - Students repeat chorally and 3. remember all the English words. - Call the English words and write the English words if there is time.. 2. Practice: (20’) *Pictures drill - Run through the pictures. - Hold up the first picture and say the model sentences: +What’s that? / What are those?. + That is a head . + Those are shoulders . - Do the same for the seccond picture. - Correct their mistakes.. - Look at the pictures. - Listen to the teacher. - Repeat it chorally and then individually. - Make the sentence for themselves. - Practice in pairs. - Some pairs practice in front.. Checking vocabulary:. 2. Practice: A1 (page 96) a) a head b) hand c) shoulders d) chest e) a finger f) a foot g) a leg.

(100) 3. Production: (7’) *Nought and crosses - Put the grid on the board. - Divide class into teams. One is noughts (O) and the other is Crosses (X). - Two teams choose any things in the boxes and ask questions about what things are . - The team which has three noughts or three crosses on a line will win the game.. 3.Further practice: - Look at the board. - Work in groups. - One is noughts (O) and the other is Crosses (X). - Choose any phrases in the boxes, ask and ask questions about where they live : +What’s that?/What are those? + That is his head . + Those are his shoulders . - Congratulate the winner.. * Homework: (3’) - Ask students to learn by heart parts of the body and - Take notes and memorize how to talk about them. - Do as the teacher requests. - Have them prepare Unit 9 Lesson 2: Adjectives to describe physical appearance.. chest. hand s. foot. finger s. leg. toes. arm. head. shoulder s. - Parts of the body. - A1, page 96: - What’s that? - That is …………… . - What are those? -Those are ……………… - Unit 9: The body - Lesson 2 :A3 - A5.. * Self – evaluation: …………………………………………………………………………………………………………… …………………………………………………………………………………………………………… ……………………………………………………………………………………………………………. Week: 20 Period: 56 Date of planning: /12/2013 Date of teaching:. UNIT 9:. THE BODY. Section: PARTS OF BODY (A3 – A4). A. Objectives: 1.Knowledge: By the end of the lesson, students will be able to know how to describe the form of a person. * Grammar present simple tense * Vocabulary tall, short, heavy, fat. Thin, light………….. 2. Skills: Listening, reading, writing 3. Behavior: enjoys reading B. Teaching aids 1/ Teacher:tape, cassette, pictures, textbook 2/ Student:vocabulary C Steps of teaching: Teacher’s activities * Warm up: (5’) - Shark’s attack - Divide the class into two teams. - Ask each team for a letter in the alphabet.. Students’ activities - Work in teams. -Look at the board. - Listen to the teacher. - Give a letter in the. Content on the board CHEST - Shoulders feet - fingers arm. legs chest.

(101) - Ask students from each team to guess the word. - The game countinues until students find out the word. 1. Presentation: (10’) - Elicit vocabulary - Use the picture to introduce physical appearance. - Say new words as pointing to the picture and ask studentsto repeat.. alphabet. - Have to try to guess the word. - Find out the word.. - Slap the board - Put the Vietnamese translation on the board. - Call two students of two teams to the front of the class. - Call out one of English words in loud voice.. - Group works. * Checking vocabulary: - Say the Vietnamese maäp, beùo translation . naëng - Run forward and slap cao the correct words on the gaày board. nheï - Continue until students thaáp have slapped all the words. 2- Dialogue build Nam: Who is that ? -Answer teacher’s Lien: That’s Chi . questions. Nam: What does she do ? - Look at the board and Lien: She’s a gymnast. listen to the teacher Ba: Is she short? carefully. Lan: No, she isn’t. She’s tall - Reproduce the dialogue S (chủ từ) + be + adjective from the cues. - Adjective (adj): short, tall, thin, fat, - Build the dialogue until heavy, light, strong, weak, …… it is memorized. - Mieâu taû ñaëc ñieåm, daùng voùc. - Write in the missing words on the board. - Look at the cues. 3. Practice: - Listen to the teacher. - Repeat it chorally and - She / short - They / light then individually. - He / fat - We / heavy - Make the sentence for themselves. - Nam / thin - Mai and Lan / - Practice in pairs. - Some pairs practice in tall front.. - Dialogue build. - Set the scene. - Read the dialogue and write few key words on the board to help students remember what the two speaker in the dialogue say to each other . - Get students to write in the missing words on the board. - Get students to isolate the model sentence. 2. Practice: (20’) - Word cue drill - Run through the cues. - Hold up the first cues and say the model sentences. - What does she / he look like ? - She is short . - He is fat. - Correct their mistakes. 3. Production: (7’) - Predict Grid - Set the scene: You are going to listen to about the forms of persons in the pictures . - Have students copy the. - Listen to the teacher. - Repeat after the teacher. - Notice the main stress pattern. - Write the new words in their notebooks.. 1-Vocabulary: - short (adj) : thaáp. - tall (adj) : cao. - thin(adj) : gaày. - fat (adj) : maäp, beùo. - heavy (adj) : naëng - light (adj) : nheï. - Listen to the teacher. 4. Further practice: - A4, page 98 - Pay attention to the teacher’s explanation. tall / Pictur Students copy the short / fat / Listen e table. thin - Guess about the a thin, tall (4) forms of persons in the b short, fat (3).

(102) table. - Get students to guess about the forms of persons in the pictures. - Let them listen to the cassette. * Homework: (3’) - Ask students to learn by heart adjectives and How to decribe physical appearance. - Have them prepare Unit 9 – Section: A5,6,R vocabulary * Self – evaluation:. pictures. - Listen to the cassette and give the answers.. c d. tall, fat short, fat. (2) (1). - Take notes and - Adjectives. - S (chủ từ) + be + adjective. memorize - Do as the teacher suggests.. …………………………………………………………………………………………………………… …………………………………………………………………………………………………………… ……………………………………………………………………………………………………………. Week: 20 Period: 57 Date of planning: /12/2013 Date of teaching:. UNIT 9:. THE BODY. Section: PARTS OF BODY (A5,6 ). A. Objectives: 1. Knowledge: By the end of the lesson ,Ss read a dialogue to recognize polite offer & request with “What would you like?” I’d like some/ to + Grammar: How do/ does + S + feel? What is the matter? + Vocabulary: words related to this section 2. Language Skill: speaking , listening skills. 3. Behavior: enjoy reading, listening B. Teaching aids : - Teacher: Text book , pictures . - Student: book, notebook C. Steps of teaching: Teacher’ activities * warm up : (5’) - ask ss some questions * Activity 1 -Asks students to look at the pictures and talk about the pictures. -ask ss listen to the tape -ask ss to give the keys -Corrects if necessary. * Activity 2 -show them a structure and explain -ask ss listen to the tape -correct if it’s mistakes. Students’ activities - Ss listen and answer. Contents -Greeting -Checking attendance. A 5. Listen and match….. -Look at the pictures and talk about the pictures. - listen and write down. -give the keys -take notices -listen -listen and read - notice. A 6. listen and repeat.. What is the matter? I want ……...

(103) *Activity 3 - explain ss and ask ss copy -show ss some pictures and ask -corect and give marks. -listen and copy. * remember ( on page107). -look at them and answer He feel … - listen and notice. I would like…. - listen and note. -Gives some works 4. Consolidation: (5’) - Show ss some pictures and ask - Corect and give marks 5. Assignments: (3’) - Asks Ss to: + Learn by heart all the new words. + Prepare new lesson U10: B1,2,3 * Self – evaluation: …………………………………………………………………………………………………… …………………………………………………………………………………………………… …………………………………………………………………………………………………… Week: 21 Period: 58 Date of planning: 02/01/2014 Date of teaching:. UNIT 9: THE BODY Section: FACES (B1,2,3). A. Objectives: 1.Knowledge: By the end of the lesson, students will be able to know how to describe the main colors of hair or skin. + Grammar: There is some Are there any – + Vocabulary: words related to this section 2. Language Skill: speaking , writing skills 3. Behavior: B. Teaching aids : - Teacher: Text book , pictures .tape ,cassetetts - Student: book, notebook C. Steps of teaching: Teacher’s activities * Warm up: (5’) - Jumbled words -Write numbers whose letters are in disorder. - Divide the class into two teams. - Ask students from each team to go to the board and write the correct words . 1. Presentation: (10’) - Elicit vocabulary - Use a chat of colors to show and tell the name of each color.. Students’ activities. Content on the board - yees = eyes -Look at the board. - hari = hair - Listen to the teacher. - cefa = face - Work in teams. - spli = lips - Go to the board and write the - sone = nose correct words. (One word, one - dreshouls = student). shoulders 1-Vocabulary: - black (adj) : maøu ñen. - Look at the chat of colors - yellow (adj) : maøu vaøng. and listen to the teacer. - white (adj) : maøu traéng. - Repeat the new words and.

(104) new look at the points the teacher - green (adj) : maøu xanh the shows. luïc. - Retell the names of colors. - gray (adj) : maøu xaùm. the - Write the new words in their - blue (adj) : maøu xanh notebooks. döông. new - red (adj) : màu đỏ. - brown (adj) : maøu naâu. - orange (adj) : maøu cam. - purple (adj) : maøu tím. - Real things - red - blue - Show things around and - Try to say the colors as the - yellow - white ask students to say the names teacher asks. Say as many - green - black of the color colors as possible. - Ask them to repeat the words as pointing to colors. - Ask them to retell names of colors. - Ask them to write the words in their notebooks. 2. Practice: (20’) - Rub out & remember dialogue - Set the scene: Lan is asking Nga about her doll. - Put the dialogue on the board . - Rub out some of the words . - Get students to isolate the model sentence. Ask students some questions : + What color is her hair ? + What color are her eyes ?. 2-Target language: - Practice saying the dialogue. Nga: I have a new doll. - Remember te rubbed out Lan: What color is her words and keep practicing it. hair?. - Repeat the rubbed out Nga: It’ s black. dialogue from memory. Lan: What color are her - Isolate the model sentence. eyes? - Answer the questions Nga: They are brown. + It’s black. - What color + is / are + S ? + They are brown - It is + Color ( maøu saéc). - Copy the notes and - They are + Color ( maøu memorize. saéc). - Maøu gì …………… ? - Hoûi veà maøu saéc.. - Picture drill - Run through the pictures. - Hold up the first picture and say the model sentences: +What color is his hair ? + It’s green. - Do the same for the seccond picture. - Correct their mistakes.. - Look at the pictures. 3. Practice: B1 (page 100) - Listen to the teacher. - Repeat it chorally and then - hair / green / eyes / individually. yellow - Make the sentence for - hair / brown / eyes / themselves. green - Practice in pairs. - Some pairs practice in front. - hair / red / eyes / black. 3. Production: (7’) - Guessing game. - Show them the pictures. Ask them to choose one of the pictures. - Get the rest of the class to guess which picture they choose. The first student guesses the house correctly comes up to the front, chooses a new picture and the game continues.. - Students look at the pictures and choose one of them the teacher shows . - The rest of the class asks him or her question to find which picture he or she chooses. * Does he / she have a black hair? * Yes, he / she does.. 4. Further practice: - a) hair / black / eyes / green - b) hair / black / eyes / black - c) eyes / yellow / hair / brown - d) eyes / yellow / hair / red - e) hair / red / eyes / green.

(105) - Ask them to listen to the * No, he/ she doesn’t. cassette and try to find out - Listen and try to find out which picture it is. which picture it is. - Ask students to learn by - Take notes and memorize heart adjectives of color to - Do as the teacher suggests. - Adjectives of colors. describe features. - What color + is / are + S - Have them prepare Unit 9 It is + Color ( maøu saéc). Lesson 4:(B4-6): Further They are + Color ( maøu practice in Body vocabulary saéc). to describe people. - Unit 9: The Body – FACES - Lesson 5 : B4 – B6. * Self – evaluation: …………………………………………………………………………………………………………… …………………………………………………………………………………………………………… ……………………………………………………………………………………………………………. Week: 21 Period: 59 Date of planning: 02/01/2014 Date of teaching:. UNIT 9: THE BODY Section: FACES ( B4,5, R ). A. Objectives: 1.Knowledge: By the end of the lesson, students will be able to use Body vocabulary to describe people by reading the text. * Grammar: present simple tense * Vocabulary tall, short, heavy, fat. Thin, light………….. 2. Skills: listening, reading, speaking 3. Behavior: B. Teaching aids - Teacher:tape, cassette, pictures, textbook - Student: vocabulary C. Steps of teaching: Teacher’s activities * Warm up: (5’) - Listen - Let students listen to the song “ Head and Shoulders, Knees and Toes” - Have them sing the song again. 1. Presentation: (10’) - Open prediction - Set the scene: You are going to read about Miss Chi. Guess how Miss Chi’s appearance. - Point to the missing passage and ask: + How is Miss Chi / her face /. Students’ activities - Listen to the song “ Head and Shoulders, Knees and Toes”. - Some sing the song again.. Content B4 – page 102. 1. Pre reading: - Listen to the teacher and answer the questions: - Students to write Miss Chi’s appearance in their books : Short, round, long, brown , amall , white, …………………………. Miss Chi is (1) ____________ and thin. She has a (2) ____________ face, (3) ________ black hair, (4) ________ eyes, a (5) ___________ nose, (6) ____.

(106) hair / eyes / nose / lips/ …? - Ask students to write three things in their books. 2. Practice: ( 20’) - Ask students to read the text on page 101 and check their predictions. - Get students to answer the questions about Miss Chi : 1. Lucky numbers - Write the numbers on the board. - Divide class into teams. The teams take turn to choose the numbers. - Tell students that they have to answer the questions . 3. Production: (7’) - Ordering pictures - Ask students to look at the pictures in B5 on page 102. - Let students listen to the cassette and put the pictures in correct order by numbering them.. ________ lips and small (7) _________ teeth .. 2. While reading: - Read the text and check B4 – page 101 their predictions. 1) tall 4) brown 7) white - Take notes and memorize 2) round 5) small - Try to ask and answer the 3) long 6) thin questions about Miss Chi 2. Reading comprehension 2 3 4 5 6 to make sure that everybody 1 in class understand how 7 1 b) What color is her hair? Miss Chi is. 2 Lucky number. - Look at the board. 3 d) Is her nose big or small? - Work in teams. - Take turn to choose the 4 e) Are her lips full or thin? 5 Lucky number. numbers. 6 a) Is Miss Chi’s hair long or short? - Answer the questions. 7 c) What color are her eyes?. - Look at the pictures on 3.Post reading: page 102. B5 , page 102 - Students listen to the cassette and put the pictuers No hair face nose in correct order by 1 shor round big numbering them. t 2 shor oval small t 3 long oval big 4 long round small 1.c 2.a 3.d. lips Full Thin Thin full 4.b. *Homework: - Ask students to learn by heart body vocabulary, adjectives, colors and how to describe the form of a person. - Have them do some exercies in the workbook from page 81 to 84 and prepare Unit 10 - Lesson 1: A1,2,5) : How to talk about feelings. - Body vocabulary, adjectives, - Take notes and memorize colors. - Do homework as the - How to describe the form of a teacher requested. person. - Exercises in the exercise book from page 81 to 84. - Unit 10: Staying Healthy – HOW DO YOU FEEL? - Lesson 1 : (A1,2,5).

(107) Week: 21 UNIT 10: STAYING HEALTHY Period: 60 Section: HOW DO YOU FEEL? (A1,2,3,4 ) Date of planning: 02/01/2014 Date of teaching: A. Objectives: 1. Knowledge:By the end of the lesson ,ss wil be able to Talk about how we feel, using adjectives of physical state. + Grammar: How do/ does + S + feel?  S + be/feel + Adj + Vocabulary: words related to this section 2. Skill: speaking , listening skills 3. Behavior: Help students know how to talk about feelings. B. Teaching aids : - Teacher: textbook, tape, cassette.. - Student: vocabulary.. C. Steps of teaching: Teacher’s activities * Warm up: (5’) - Mapped dialogue - Put the dialogue on the board which is only words. The words are cues. - Model the dialogue. - Run through the cues like a drill with the whole class.. Students’ activities. Content on the board. - Look at the board and listen to the teacher. - Repeat after the teacher. - Practice the dialogue in pair . - Some pairs practice in front. - Rewrite the dialogue .. Lan  Nam  How many/ 4:F,M,B and …? me - your B / tall ? Yes. - short hair ? X. - color / hair ? brown nose/big/small? small. - color / eyes? blue.. 1. Presentation: (10’) - Elicit vocabulary  Situation  Visual  Translation  Situation  Mime  Antonym. 1-Vocabulary: - hungry (adj) - Listen to the teacher. - thirsty (adj) - Repeat after the teacher. - full (adj) - Notice the main stress - tired (adj) pattern. - cold (adj) - Write the new words in - hot (adj) their notebooks.. - Rub out and remember -Point to the Vietnamese translations and rub out English words. - Get students to call the English words.. - Students repeat chorally - Checking vocabulary: and remember all the English words. - Call the English words and write the English words if there is time.. - Presentation picture. - Show students the pictures and ask them questions: + What ‘s he / she doing? + What ‘s she doing? + How does he feel? + How does she feel? + How do you feel?. 2- Target language: - Look at the pictures and A1,2 P 104 -105 listen to the teacher’s - How do you feel? questions. - I’m hungry. - Try to answer the - How does he feel? questions. - He feels hot. + He’s eating. - How does she feel? + He’s hungry. - She feels cold. + She’s drinking. How do / does + S + feel?. : : : : : :. đói. khaùt. no. meät. laïnh. noùng ..

(108) - Explain the meanings of the questions and help them to answer / express their feelings. - Let them take notes and memorize. 2. Practice: (20’) - Word cue drill - Run through the cues. - Hold up the first cues and say the model sentences. - How do you feel? I am hungry. - How does he / she feel? - He / she’s tired. - Correct their mistakes. 3. Production: (7’) - Ordering pictures - Ask students to look at the pictures in A5 on page 106. - Let students listen to the cassette and match the names with the right pictures.. + She’s thirty. S + am / is / are + adjective + We’re full. - Caûm giaùc nhö theá naøo ? - Understand the meanings - Hoûi veà caûm giaùc. of the questions. Take notes and memorize. - Look at the cues. 3. Practice: - Listen to the teacher. - Repeat it chorally and - you / hungry then individually. - He / tire - Make the sentence for - She / cold themselves. - They / full - Practice in pairs. - He / hot - Some pairs practice in front. - Look at the pictures on page 106. - Students listen to the cassette and match the names with the right pictures.. 4.Further practice: A5 , page 106 - Phuong - b) : Phuong is thirsty. She’d like a drind. - Nhan – a) : Nhan is hungry. He’d like noodles. - Ba – f) : Ba is full. - Huong – d) : Huong is cold.. * Homework: (3’) - Ask students to learn by - Take notes and memorize heart adjectives of - Do as the teacher - Adjectives of Physical State. Physical State and how to suggests. - How do / does + S + feel? express their feelings. S + am / is / are + adjective - Have them prepare Unit 9 - Unit 9: Staying Healthy – Lesson 2:(A3-4): Polite HOW DO YOU FEEL? - Lesson Offers and Requests with 2 : A3 – A4. “What...like? * Self – evaluation: …………………………………………………………………………………………………………… …………………………………………………………………………………………………………… ……………………………………………………………………………………………………………. Week: 22 UNIT 10: STAYING HEALTHY Period: 61 Section: HOW DO YOU FEEL? (A5,6,R ) Date of planning: 02/01/2014 Date of teaching: A. Objectives: 1.Knowledge: By the end of the lesson, students will be able to ask questions and answer “What would he/ she like .…….. ? + Grammar: How do/ does + S + feel? What is the matter? + Vocabulary: words related to this section 2. Language Skill: speaking , listening skills..

(109) 3. Behavior: enjoy reading, listening B. Teaching aids : 1. Teacher:Text book , pictures 2. Student: book, notebook C. Steps of teaching: Teacher’s activities * Warm up: (5’) -Chatting - Ask students some questions about their class. - Teacher – whole class.. Students’ activities - Answer the teacher’s questions about their class. - Students – Teacher.. Content on the board - How do you feel? - Are you hot? - Are you thirsty?. 1. Presentation: (10’) - Elicit vocabulary  Situation  Translation  Situation. - Listen to the teacher. 1-Vocabulary: - Repeat after the teacher. - Noodles (unc) : buùn, mieán. - Notice the main stress - to like : thích. pattern. - a drink : thức uống. - Write the new words in their notebooks.. - Rub out and remember -Point to the Vietnamese translations and rub out English words. - Get students to call the English words.. - Students repeat chorally and remember all the English words. - Call the English words and write the English words if there is time.. - Predict dialogue - Set the scene: Lan is talking to Nam about her classmate. - Put the dialogue on the board. Some of the words are missing. - Ask students to guess what the missing words are. 2. Practice: (20’) - Ask students to read the dialogue and check their predictions.. - Listen to the teacher. - Read the dialogue. - Guess what the missing words are.. Students read the dialogue and check their predictions.. *Grid - Ask students to read the dialogue again and - Read the dialogue again complete the table. and complete the table.. 3. Production: (7’) -Lucky numbers - Write the numbers on the board. - Divide class into teams. The teams take turn to. - Look at the board. - Work in teams. - Take turn to choose the numbers.. 2-Predict dialogue Nam: How do you feel? Lan: I’m (1) ______ and (2) _______ . Nam: What would you like? Lan: I’d like some (3) _______ . What about you? Nam: I’m (4) ______ . I’d like some (5) _______ . 3 .While reading: A3, page 105 1- hot 4- hungry 2- thirsty 5- noodles 3- orange juice Name Feelings Would like s Lan hot, thirsty orange juice Nam hungry noodles Ba tired to sit down 4.Post reading: Reading comprehension 1 2 3 4 5 1 Lucky number. 2 How does Lan feel?.

(110) choose the numbers. - Listen to the teacher - Tell students that they carefully. have to answer the - Answer the questions. questions .. 3 What would Lan like? 4 Lucky number. 5 How does Ba feel? 6 What would Nam like?. *Homework: Take - Ask students to learn by memorize heart vocabulary and - Do as “would like”. requests. - Have them prepare Unit 10 - Lesson 3: (B4,5) : Polite request “I’d like some ………”. notes the. and - Vocabulary. teacher - Would like. - Unit 10: Staying Healthy – FOOD AND DRINK - Lesson 3 : (B4,5). * Self – evaluation: …………………………………………………………………………………………………………… …………………………………………………………………………………………………………… ……………………………………………………………………………………………………………. Week: 22 UNIT 10: STAYING HEALTHY Period: 62 Section: FOOD and DRINK (B1,2,3) Date of planning: 02/01/2014 Date of teaching: A. Objectives: 1.Knowledge: By the end of the lesson, students will be able to know how to use “some” and“any” and talk about food & drink. + Grammar: There is some Are there any – + Vocabulary: words related to this section 2. Skill: speaking , writing skills 3. Behavior: B. Teaching aids : - Teacher: Text book , pictures .tape ,cassetetts - Student: book, notebook C. Steps of teaching: Teacher’s activities * Warm up: (5’) -Networks - Write a network on the board and put some more words below it. - Get students to think of food and drink. - Get students to put the given words in the appropriate circles - Give feedback. 1. Presentation: (10’) -Elicit vocabulary - Use pictures to introduce new. Students’ activities. Content on the board. - Students to think of the rice town and country. milk - Go to the board and fill fruit in the remaining empty circles with their own food words.. life. meat. chicken - Listen and look at things 1-Vocabulary: shown by the teacher. - an apple : quaû taùo. - Try to say the names of - an orange : quaû cam..

(111) words . - Have some students say the names of food and drink the teacher show. -What and where - Elicit the vocabulary from the students and write them in the circles. - Get students to repeat the words including the rubbed out words by pointing at the empty circle. - Rub out & remember dialogue - Set the scene: Phuong and Thu are talking about food and drink. - Put the dialogue on the board . - Rub out some of the words . - Get students to isolate the model sentence. - Point to the model sentence and ask : + What’s this ? + What comes after……… ? + Is it a negative sentence?...... 2. Practice: (20’) - Word cue drill - Run through the cues. - Hold up the first cues and say the model sentences. - Is there any water?. - Yes. There is some water. - Are there any bananas? - No. There aren’t any bananas. - Correct their mistakes. 3. Production: (7’) - Guessing game. - Show them the pictures. Ask them to choose one of the pictures. - Get the rest of the class to guess which picture they. food and drink shown. - Write the new words in their notebooks.. - a banana : quaû chuoái. - water (unc) : nước.. banana - Students repeat chorally and remember all the orange words. - Go to the board and fill in apple the circles with the right noodles words. - Practice saying the dialogue. - Remember te rubbed out words and keep practicing it. - Repeat the rubbed out dialogue from memory. - Isolate the model sentence. - Listen to the teacher and answer the questions: + There is / are + some / any + No - Take notes.. - Look at the cues. - Listen to the teacher. - Repeat it chorally and then individually. - Make the sentence for themselves. - Practice in pairs. - Some pairs practice in front.. 2-Target language: B2, page 109 Phuong: What’s for lunch?. Thu: There’s some meat and some rice. Phuong: Are there any noodles? Thu: No.There aren’t any noodles. Phuong: Is there any fruit? Thu: Yes. There is some fruit……… (+) There is/are + some +noun. (?) Is/are there + any + noun? (-) There is/are + not + any + N. -Coù.../Coù khoâng?/Khoâng coù… - Some (+) / Any (?, - ) : moät vaøi / ít. 3. Practice: 3. B3, page 109 - water / (+) - bananas / (-) - rice / (-) - oranges / (+) - milk / (+) - apples / (-). 4. Further practice: - Students look at the pictures and choose one of them the teacher shows . - The rest of the class asks him or her question to find which picture he or she. water. - a) noodles - b) meat - c) oranges.

(112) choose. The first student chooses. guesses the food / drink * Is there any water? correctly comes up to the front, * Yes. There is some chooses a new picture and the water. game continues. * No. There isn’t any water. * Homework: (3’) - Ask students to learn by heart - Take notes and memorize vocabulary and some / any - Do as the teacher with there is / are. suggests. - Have them prepare Unit 10 MY FAVORITE FOOD Lesson 5:(C1-2): Do you like …………… ?. - d) water - e) vegetables. - Vocabulary (some food and drink) - (+) There is/are + some +noun. (?) Is/are there + any + noun? (-) There is/are + not + any + N. - Unit 10: Staying Healthy – MY FAVORITE FOOD Lesson 5 : C1–C2.. * Self – evaluation: …………………………………………………………………………………………………………… …………………………………………………………………………………………………………… ……………………………………………………………………………………………………………. Week: 22 UNIT 10: STAYING HEALTHY Period: 63 Section: FOOD and DRINK (B4,5,R) Date of planning: 02/01/2014 Date of teaching: A. Objectives: 1.Knowledge: By the end of the lesson, students will be able to use nouns and tell what they would like and talk about food and drink. + Grammar: There is some, I’d like some Are there any – + Vocabulary: words related to this section 2. Language Skill: speaking , writing skills. 3. Behavior: enjoy reading, speaking B. Teaching aids : - Teacher:Text book , pictures .tape ,cassetetts - Student: book, notebook C. Steps of teaching: Teacher’s activities * Warm up: (5’) - Nought and crosses - Put the grid on the board. - Divide class into teams. One is noughts (O) and the other is Crosses (X). - Two teams choose any words in the boxes and ask. Students’ activities - Look at the board. - Work in groups. - One is noughts (O) and the other is Crosses (X). - Choose any words in the boxes, ask and ask questions about feelings :. Content on the board hungry cool sad. full tired thirsty. hot happy boring.

(113) questions about feelings . - The team which has three noughts or three crosses on a line will win the game. 1. Presentation: (10’) - Elicit vocabulary - Use some fruits and pictures to introduce new words . - Have some students say the names of food and drink the teacher shows. - Use pictures to explain the meaning of the words: chicken, rice, fish, meat, milk, fruit. - What and where - Elicit the vocabulary from the students and write them in the circles. - Get students to repeat the words including the rubbed out words by pointing at the empty circle.. +How do you feel/ does he feel?. +I’m / He’s thirsty.. - Presentation text. - Ask students to read the dialogue in B4 on page 110 and answer the questions : + Where are they? + How does he feel?. + Does he want any chicken? + What does he ask her? - Isolate the model sentences by underlining the model sentence. - Ask them to write the form in their notebooks. 2. Practice: (20’). 2- Target language: - Listen to the teacher’s 4. A6(page 99) explanation. A- I’m hungry. I’d like some chicken - Read the statements. and some rice. What would you - Answer the questions. like? - Understand of the B- I’m not hungry, but I’m thirsty. I’d target language in term like some orange juice. of meaning, use and form What would you like? by pointing to the I’d like some + noun signs. - ’d like (would like) : muoán - Write the form in their - Baïn muoán gì? notebooks. - Lời đề nghị, mời lịch sự.. Picture drill - Run through the pictures. - Hold up the first picture and say the model sentences: +What would you like? + I’d like some chicken. - Do the same for the seccond picture. - Correct their mistakes. 3. Production: (7’) - Mapped dialogue. - Listen to the teacher. - Try to say the names of food and drink shown by the teacher. - Notice the meaning of the words. - Write the new words in their notebooks.. - Students repeat chorally and remember all the words. - Go to the board and fill in the circles with the right words.. 1 -Vocabulary: - chicken (unc) : thòt gaø. - rice (unc) : côm, gaïo. - a fish : caù. - bread (unc) : baùnh mì. - meat (unc) : thòt. - vegetables (n) : rau caûi. - milk (unc) : sữa. - fruit (unc) : traùi caây. - orange juice (unc) : nước cam. chicken fish bread fruit. meat milk orange juice. 3. Practice: B1 (page 100) - chicken - fish - Look at the pictures. - rice - orange juice - Listen to the teacher. - Repeat it chorally and - bread fruit then individually. - Make the sentence for themselves. - Practice in pairs. - Some pairs practice in front. - Look at the board and 4.Further practice: listen to the teacher..

(114) - Put the dialogue on the board which is only words. The words are cues. - Model the dialogue. - Run through the cues like a drill with the whole class.. - Repeat after the teacher. - Practice the dialogue in pair . - Some pairs practice in front. - Rewrite the dialogue .. * Homework: (3’) - Ask students to learn by heart vocabulary and Polite requests / offers. - Have them prepare Unit 10 : Section: C1,2,3,4,R * Self – evaluation:. 5.Homework: - Take notes and - Vocabulary. memorize - What would you like? - Do as the teacher I’d like some + noun suggests.. Mai  Nam  ………. feel ? cold+hungr ……………… like ? y ………………thirsty noodles. … … orange juice feel? ………… … like?. …………………………………………………………………………………………………………… …………………………………………………………………………………………………………… ……………………………………………………………………………………………………………. Week: 23 Period: 64 Date of planning: 02/01/2014 Date of teaching:. UNIT 10: STAYING HEALTHY Section: My favorite food ( C1,2,3,4,R). A. Objective: 1.Knowledge: By the end, students will be able to use the verb “like” to speak about their favorite food and drink to contrast “would you like --? With “Do you like…?” + Grammar: would you like --? With “Do you like + Vocabulary: words related to this section 2. Language Skill: speaking , listening skills. 3. behavior: enjoy writing, reading B. Teaching aids : - Teacher: textbook, tape, cassette.. - Student: book, notebook C. Steps of teaching: Teacher’s activities * Warm up: (5’) - Kim’s game - Have students look at the poster of food / drink and try to remember as many words as possible. - Divide class into two groups. - Put away the poster and ask students to go to the board and write the words they’ve seen from memory. - The group having the most right English words is. Students’ activities - Look at the pictures of Ba’s and Chi’s house (Page 76, 77) in 20 seconds and try to remember as many facilities as possible. - Work in groups. - Put away the pictures and ask students to go to the board and write the facilities they’ve seen from memory. - Congratulate.. Content on the board.

(115) the winner. 1. Presentation: (10’) - Elicit vocabulary - Use some fruits and pictures to introduce new words . - Have some students say the names of food and drink the teacher shows. - Use pictures to explain the meaning of the words: lettuce, pea, bean, onion, ……… - Rub out and remember -Point to the Vietnamese translations and rub out English words. - Get students to call the English words. - Predict dialogue - Set the scene: Nhan is asking Mai about What her favorite food is. - Put the dialogue on the board. Some of the words are missing. - Ask students to guess what the missing words are. - Ask them to read the completed dialogue, isolate the model sentence. 2. Practice: (20’) - Picture drill - Run through the pictures. - Hold up the first picture and say the model sentences: +Do you like carrots? + Yes, I do. I like carrots. + No, I don’t. I don’t like carrots - Do the same for the seccond picture. - Correct their mistakes. 3. Production: ( 7’) - Mapped dialogue - Put the dialogue on the board which is only words. The words are cues. - Model the dialogue.. - Listen to the teacher. - Try to say the names of food and drink shown by the teacher. - Notice the meaning of the words. - Write the new words in their notebooks.. 1-Vocabulary: - a carrot : củ cà rốt - a bean : hạt đậu . - a tomato : quả cà chua. - lettuce (unc) : rau xà lách. - a potato : củ khoai tây. - a pea : đậu hạt tròn. - a cabbage : bắp cải. - an onion : củ hành.. - Students repeat chorally * Checking vocabulary: and remember all the English words. - Call the English words and write the English words if there is time. - Listen to the teacher. - Read the dialogue. - Guess what the missing words are. - Students read the completed dialogue, isolate the model sentence. - Take notes and try to remember.. - Look at the pictures. - Listen to the teacher. - Repeat it chorally and then individually. - Make the sentence for themselves. - Practice in pairs. - Some pairs practice in front.. 2- Target language: C2, page 112 Nhan: What’s your favorite food, Mai? Mai: I like (1) (fish). . Nhan: Do you like vegetables? Mai: (2)(yes) , I (3) (do). Nhan: Do you like (4)(carrots) ? Mai: No, I don’t. I like (5)(peas)and (6)(beans) (+) I like +noun. (?) Do you like + noun? (-) I don’t + like + noun. - Like : thích - Nói về sở thích lâu dài của ai đó. 3. Practice: * C1 (page 112) - carrots - beans - tomatoes - lettuce - potatoes. - peas - cabbages - onions. - Look at the board and 4.Further practice: listen to the teacher. Lan  Nga  - Repeat after the teacher. What/favorite? chicken - Practice the dialogue in Do / carrots ? V / vegetables? pair . X / fish ? X / tomatoes ? - Some pairs practice in V / you ? Tomatoes /.

(116) - Run through the cues like front. a drill with the whole class. - Rewrite the dialogue .. too. * Homework: (3’) - Ask students to learn by Take notes and - Vocabulary (some vegetables) - Do you like + noun ? heart vocabulary and memorize - Yes, I do / No, I don’t. how to talk their own - Do as the teacher - Unit 11: A1 favorite food. suggests. - Have them prepare: Unit 11: A1 * Self – evaluation: …………………………………………………………………………………………………… …………………………………………………………………………………………………… …………………………………………………………………………………………………… Week: 23 UNIT 11: WHAT DO YOU EAT? Period: 65 Section: AT THE STORE (A1) Date of planning: 02/01/2014 Date of teaching: A. Objective: 1.Knowledge: By the end, students will be able to use quantifies and containes to talk about things people buy at the store. + Grammar: can I help …..? + Vocabulary: words related to this section 2. Skill: speaking , writing skills. 3. behavior: enjoy writing, reading B. Teaching aids : - Teacher: textbook, tape, cassette.. - Student: book, notebook C. Steps of teaching: Teacher’s activities * Warm up: (5’) - Guessing game. - Show them some drinks. Ask them to choose one of them. - Get the rest of the class to guess which drink they choose. The first student guesses the drink correctly comes up to the front, chooses a new words and the game continues. 1. Presentation: (10’) - Elicit vocabulary - Show things in the picture and read their names aloud. + What’s this? + How can you say it in. Students’ activities - Students look at the pictures and choose one of the drinks the teacher shows - The rest of the class asks him or her question to find which drink he or she chooses. * Does he / she like ? * Yes, he / she does. * No,he / she doesn’t. - Listen to the teacher. - Repeat after the teacher. - Notice the main stress pattern. - Write the new words. Content on the board - Lemonade - Soda - Iced - tea - Coffee. 1-Vocabulary: - an egg : trứng. - Cooking oil : daàu aên. - Beef (unc) : thòt boø . - Soap (unc) : caø pheâ. - Tooth paste (unc) : kem đánh răng..

(117) Enghlish? - Aks students to repeat.. in their notebooks.. - Slap the board - Put the Vietnamese translation on the board. - Call two students of two teams to the front of the class. - Call out one of English words in loud voice.. - Group works. - Say the Vietnamese translation . - Run forward and slap the correct words on the board. Continue until students have slapped all the words.. * Matching - Put the pictures and English words on the board. -Ask students to match English words with the pictures . - Ask students to work in teams.. 1. Group works. - Lookl at the board. - Listen to the teacher. - Work in teams. - Come to the board and match English words with the pictures.. - a chocolate : soâ coâ la Checking vocabulary:. 200 grams of 10 kilos of abar of a can of a box of a packet of a tube of a dozen of a bottle of. 2. Practice: (20’) - Word cue drill. - Look at the cues. 2. Practice: - Listen to the teacher. - a bottle / cooking oil - Repeat it chorally - a packet / tea - Run through the cues. and then individually. - a box / chocolates - Hold up the first cues - Make the sentence - a kilo / rice and say the model for themselves. - 200 gram / beef sentences. - Practice in pairs. - a dozen / eggs - Can I help you? - Some pairs practice - Yes, I’d like 200gram of in front. beef - Correct their mistakes. 3. Production: (7’) 3. further practice: - Pelmanism. - Look at the board. 1. a bar of 6. eggs - Stick 10 cards on the - Listen to the a can of 7. water board so that the students teacher’s explanation. 2. can only see the numbers, - Work in teams. 3. a dozen 8. tea make sure the words are - One of student in mixed up. each team chooses 4. a bottle of 9. soap - Divide the slass into two any two numbers. teams and ask students to - Go on until the cards 5. a packet of 10. 7up choose two numbers. are turned over. - Go on until the cards are turned over. * Homework: - Ask students to learn by - Take notes and - Vocabulary: + Quantifies heart vocabulary: memorize + Containers Quantifies and containers. - Do as the teacher.

(118) - Have them prepare Unit suggests. - Unit 11: What do you eat? – AT THE 11 - AT THE STORE STORE - Lesson 2 : A2 – A4. Lesson 2:(A2-A4): ListenSpecific information about quanlities. * Self – evaluation: …………………………………………………………………………………………………… …………………………………………………………………………………………………… …………………………………………………………………………………………………… Week: 23 Period: 66 Date of planning: 02/01/2014 Date of teaching:. UNIT 11: WHAT DO YOU EAT? Section: AT THE STORE (A2). A. Objectives: 1.Knowledge: By the end, students will be able to listen specific information about qualities for food shopping. + Grammar: how much ….? How many………..? + Vocabulary: words related to this section 2. Skill: speaking , writing skills 3. behavior: enjoy writing, reading, listening B. Teaching aids: - Teacher: Cassette, tape and textbook. - Student: vocabulary, textbook C. Steps of teaching: Teacher’s activities * Warm up: (5’) - Bingo - Put the table on the board. -Ask students to choose any five words and copy them into their books. - Let students listen to the cassette and correct. 1. Presentation: (10’) - Elicit vocabulary  Transltion  Situation  Situation  Visual  Translation. Students’ activities - Read the words in the table. - Listen to the teacher. - Choose any five words. - Put ticks next to the words that they listen to. - Shouts “Bingo”. - Listen to the teacher. - Repeat after the teacher. - Notice the main stress pattern. - Write the new words in their notebooks.. Content on the board - beef - egg - dozen - oil - rice. - bottle - tea - water - gram - chocolate. 1-Vocabulary: - to need : caàn. - How much / How many : bao nhieâu. - Can I hepl you? : Toâi coù theå giuùp gì cho baïn ? - Half (a kilo) : 1/2 - a cookie : banh qui gai. -Rub out and remember Students repeat Checking vocabulary: -Point to the Vietnamese chorally and remember translations and rub out all the English words. English words. - Call the English words - Get students to call the and write the English English words. words if there is time. - Predict dialogue (poster)A2, page 112.

(119) - Set the scene: + Where is Ba? + What does he want? + How much / many ……? - Put the dialogue on the board. Some of the words are missing. - Ask students to guess what the missing words are.. - Listen to the teacher. -Answer the teacher’s questoins. - Read the dialogue. - Guess what the missing words are. - Students give their prediction.. Salesgirl: Can I hepl you? Ba: Yes, I’d like some (1) ___ , please. Salesgirl: How much do you want? Ba: (2) ______ grams , please. Salesgirl: Is there any things else ? Ba: Yes, I need some (3)___ . Salesgirl: How many do you want? Ba: (4) ______ , please.. 2. Practice: (20’) 2- listening: - Get students to listen to - Listen to the tape two 1. beef 3. eggs the tape 2 times . times. 2. 200 4. a dozen - Correct their prediction. - Check their prediction. - Comprehension question a. At the store d. a dozen - Ask students to listen the - Listen the tape again . b. beef tape again, then answer the Then answer the c. 200 questions. questions. - A3 on page 117 - Matching + Phuong - a tube of toothpaste. - Let them listen to the + Ly - a bar of soap and cassette and find out things - Listen to the cassette - a box of chocolates that people want to buy. and find out things that + Mai - a can of soda - Let some of students people want to buy. + Nam – a packet of cookies answer and ask the whole Some of students class tvo listen to again answer and ask the and check their answers. whole class tvo listen to again and check their answers. 3. Production: (7’) 3- shopping lists - Let students read the - Read the dialogue. dialogue then make a - Make a shopping list. How much / shopping list and hve - Replace things in the Things How students read by dialogue with their own many themselves then do the shopping list and rewrite exercises as quick as the dialogue. - Cooking oil - a bottle possible. - Practice with partner. - Rice - 2 kilo - Call some students and - Write the dialogue in - Beef - half a kilo ask them to do the the notebooks. - Oranges - half a dozen exercises, then check and correct the mistakes. *Homework: (3’) - Ask students to learn by heart vocabulary. - Have them prepare Unit 11 – L 3 :(A2):How much / many. * Self – evaluation:. - Take notes and - Vocabulary memorize - Unit 11: What do you eat? – AT - Do as the teacher THE STORE - Lesson 2 : A2. suggests.. …………………………………………………………………………………………………………… …………………………………………………………………………………………………………… …………………………………………………………………………………………………………….

(120) Duyệt của BGH. Week: 24 Period: 67 Date of planning: 22/01/2014 Date of teaching:. Duyệt của tổ trưởng. UNIT 11: WHAT DO YOU EAT ? Section: AT THE STORE ( A3,4,R ). A. Objectives: 1. Knowledge: - By the of the lesson, Ss will be able to listening for specific information about quantities for food shopping. “How much…?” and “How many…?” with “want” and “need” to talk about quantities for shopping. * Grammar: - a bottle/ a packet/ a box A can/ a kilo/ a dozen of Half kilo * Vocabulary: words relating to A.1 2. Skills: listening, reading, writing 3. Behavior: B. Teaching aids:.

(121) - Teacher: Text book, lesson plan, cassette, tapes. - Students: textbook, notebook…… C. Steps of teaching: Teacher’s activities * Warm-up : (5’) - Pelmanism Showing cards and asks: ?Can you guess which activities ?How do you play it ?Work in 2 groups-choose a pair of number to find out quantifier with suitable nouns. I- Pre listening: (10’) 1.Pre-teach: 2. Elicits words from Ps. - Can I help you ? ( explanation) -to want? ( traslation) -(to) need (explanation) - How much ( explample) - Checks: R.O.R 2. Predict dialogue Sets the rcene \: Ba is at the st to know what are they talking about I have a dialogue with some gaps ? guess the words to complete the dialogue Runs through the dialogue. II. While – Listening: (20’) ?Listen to the dialogue and check your guessing Plays the tape twice ? Work in pairs to discuss your answers ? Which strure is new in the dialogue ? Meaning ? form Which activities can you guess I have 6 numbers in which, there. Pupils’ activities. The content on the board 3.. - Work in 2 groups to find out quantifieess and containers with rui table nouns - Copy the titfe Guessing the meaning of newworols Liten and answes Liten and repeat chous and Indivi dually. Giving the meaning the from and how to use them.. Listen to Is expla-nation Read the dialogue and guess the words to coplete the dialogue Listen to the dialogue And heck their guessing Work in pairs to discuss their Indirgclual work. Gining the meaning the fom. Copy model sentences in their notebooks.. Pelmanism A bottle of A bar. water soap. A tube of toothpaster A dozen. eggs. A kilo of. meat. A box of. chocolates. 1.Vocabulary “ Can I help you ? -(to) want: muèn -(to) need: cÇn -How much: bao nhiªu - uncoun table noun - How many? Bao nhiªu ( countable 2.Predict dialogue S: Can I help you ? Ba: Yes , Id like some(1) pleas S: How much do you want? Ba (2): grams, please S. Is there anything else? Ba, yes, I need some(3) S: How many do you want? Ba: (4) ……., please Answer keys. 1. bey 2. 200 3. eggs 4. a dozen 3. Model sentenees I need / want some bey. How much do you need/ want? I need / want some eggs How many do you want / need Meaning: Form: How much + do /does + S + uncoutable.

(122) are 2 lucky numbers and 4 QS ? How do you play this game 1a; 2- LN; 3- b; 4-c; 5 LN; 6-d ? Look at the picture A3 and prrecdiet the name with thing they like. ? Listen and check your guessing Ph¬ng wants a tube of toothpaste Ly wantsa abar of tooth paste III. Port listening: (7’) You’se going to lesten to the dialuge between Nam and his mom. His mom wants him to buy 4 things that she needs at the store ? Gueess 4 things she needs ? Listen and cheek your guesing Feedbacks. How many + do/ does +S + coutable noun? 4. Comprehension questions Lucky number lestening 4. ( Lucky Number) Work in paiss to discuss their answers (1) (2) (3) (4) (5) Matching. Name guess Chek Phong Ly Mai Nam. d e,a b c. Individual work guess 4 things that Nam’s mother wants him to buy 5.Open prediction at the store guess Check 1 a bottle of Listen ti the dialogue 2 cooking oil and check their guessing 2 kilos of rice 3 1/2 kilo of bey * Homework: 4 A docen oranges -Learn by heart all new words 6. Homeworks: -Do exercises -Learn by heart all new -Prepare new lesson: B1,2,3 words -Do exercises -Prepare new lesson: B1,2,3 * Self – evaluation: …………………………………………………………………………………………………………… …………………………………………………………………………………………………………… ……………………………………………………………………………………………………………. Week: 24 Period: 68 Date of planning: 22/01/2014 Date of teaching:. UNIT 11: WHAT DO YOU EAT? Section: AT THE CANTEEN (B1, 2, 3). A. Objectives: 1. Knowledge: - By the end of the lesson , students will be able to practice in offers and requests for food and drink. + Grammar: (structure) what would you like for …? + Vocabulary: : relating to B1, B2, B3 2. Skills: listening, speaking , writing skills 3. Behavior: B. Teaching aids : - Teacher: textbook, cassette, tape - Student: book, notebook C. Steps of teaching: Teacher’s activities. Students’ activities. Content on the board.

(123) * Warm up: (5’) - Kim’s game - Have students look at the picture of food / drink in B1 on page119 and try to remember as many words as possible. - Divide class into two groups. - Put away the picture and ask students to go to the board and write the words they’ve seen from memory. - The group having the most right English words is the winner. 1.Presentation : (10’) - Show students the picture . - Say the model sentences: + What would you like for breakfast? + I’d like some milk. + What would you like for lunch? + I’d like some rice , fish and a banana .. - Look at the picture of food and drink (B1,Page 119) in 20 seconds and try to remember as many words as possible. - Work in groups. - Put away the picture and ask students to go to the board and write things they’ve seen from memory. - Congratulate.. rice. noodles. beef. - B3 on page 119 - Students read the - What would you like for breakfast? dialogue in A2 on - I’d like some milk and a banana. page 116 again . - What would you like for lunch? - Make the questions - I’d like some meat, vegetables and an to isolate the model orange. sentence: - What would you like for + N(meal)? -How much beef do - I’d like some / a / you an……………………… want? -How many eggs do - Bạn dùng gì cho bữa ăn ……………?. - Toâi muoán ………………………. you want?.

(124) 2. Practice: (20’) - Picture drill - Run through the pictures. - Hold up the first picture and say the model sentences: +What would you like for lunch? + I’d like some meat, rice and vegetables. - Do the same for the seccond picture. - Correct their mistakes. 3. Production: (7’) - Survey - Get students to fill in their real names and what time they do the following things. - Get them to practice in pairs: + What would you like for …? + I ‘d like some / a / an ………. - Feedback.. - Look at the pictures. - Listen to the teacher. - Repeat it chorally and then individually. - Make the sentence for themselves. - Practice in pairs. - Some pairs practice in front. - Fill in their real names and what time they do the following things. - Practice in pairs. - Tell the teacher what they have asked their partner, e.g.“Lan would like some milk and bread for her breakfast…… …. * Homework: (3’) - Ask students to learn vocabulary and offers / requests for food and drink. - Have them prepare Unit 11: (B4,5,R):Talking about prices of food and drink with “How much…?” * Self – evaluation:. - Take notes and memorize - Do as the teacher suggests.. - rice. - soda. - noodles. - meat. - bananas. - fish. - milk. - vegetables. What would you like for….? break-fast lunch dinner milk, ………… …………… bread .. … … …………… ………… …………… … ………… … …………… …………… … …. Name - Lan ………… … ………… … …………. Homework: - Food and drink. - What would you like for breakfast / lunch / dinner ? I’d like some / a / an ................... - Unit 11: What do you eat? – AT THE CANTEEN -. …………………………………………………………………………………………………………… …………………………………………………………………………………………………………… …………………………………………………………………………………………………………….

(125) Week: 24 Period 69 Date of planning: 22/01/2014 Date of teaching:. UNIT 11: WHAT DO YOU EAT ? Section: AT THE CANTEEN (B4,5,R). A. Objectives: 1. Knowledge: By the end of the lesson , students will be able to practice in offers and requests for food and drink. + Grammar: (structure) what would you like for …? + Vocabulary: : relating to B1, B2, B3 2. Skills: listening, speaking , writing 3. Behavior: B. Teaching aids : - Teacher: textbook, cassette, tape, pictures - Student: book, notebook C. Steps of teaching: Teacher’s activities Students’ activities Content on the board * Warm up: (5’) Revision: - Bingo - Put the table on the board. -Look at the board. a can of soda, a bottle of water, -Ask students to choose any - Listen to the some rice, a glass of orange juice, five things and copy them into teacher. some meat, some oranges, some fish, their books. - Choose any five some vegetables, some chicken, a bowl - Read out the words in any things. of noodles. order. - Put ticks next to the things that they listen to. - Shouts “Bingo”. 1. Presentation: (10’) - Listen to the 1-Vocabulary: - Elicit vocabulary teacher. - Fifty : 50.  Visual - Repeat after the - a hundred (Two hundred) : 100 (200)  // teacher. - a thousand(Two thousand): 1000 /  // - Notice the main 2000 stress pattern. - seven thousand five hundred : 7.500.  // - Write the new words in their notebooks. - Slap the board - Group works. 2000 - Put the numbers on the - Say the numbers 7.500 board. in English . - Call two students of two teams - Run forward and 100 to the front of the class. slap the correct 1000 - Call out one of numbers in numbers on the 200 English in loud voice. board. - Students have slapped all the numbers. Presentation text - Students read the 2- Target language: - Ask students to read a menu menu. How much is / It’s / in A5 on page 120 then anwer Answer the are…? they’re some questions about prices to questions about - a fried rice 2,500ñ isolate the model sentence: prices to isolate the.

(126) + How much is a fried rice? + How much is a cake? + How much is a sandwich? - Let students copy the notes in their notebooks and memorize.. 2. Practice: (20’) - Board drill Put a menu on the board. Run through the phrazes. Say the model sentences. Do the same for the second cue. Correct their mistakes.. 3. Production: (7’) - Nought and crosses - Put the grid on the board. - Divide class into teams. One is noughts (O) and the other is Crosses (X). - Two teams choose any words in the boxes and ask questions about prices . - The team which has three noughts or three crosses on a line will win the game. * Homework: (3’) - Ask students to learn vocabulary and structures (Unit 11). - Have them do exercises in the exercise book from page 43 to 46 and prepare Unit 11 - L6GRAMMAR PRACTICE: like, a/an/some/any, adjectives , question words………… . * Self – evaluation:. model sentence: + It’s 2,500 ñ. + It’s 500 ñ. + It’s 1,500 ñ. - Copy the notes in the notebooks and memorize.. - a bowl of noodles 3,000ñ - a sandwich 1,500ñ - a cake 500ñ - an orange juice 1,800ñ - a lemon juice 1,000ñ - an ice-cream 2,000ñ - How much + be + S ? - It / they + be + price - Giaù bao nhieâu? - Hoûi veà giaù caû. 3. Practice:. Read the shopping list. Read the phrazes. Repeat after the teacher (The fisrt cue then the second cue). Make the sentences for themselves.. How much is / It’s / are…? they’re - a fried rice 2,500ñ - a bowl of noodles 3,000ñ - a sandwich 1,500ñ - a cake 500ñ - an orange juice 1,800ñ - a lemon juice 1,000ñ - an ice-cream 2,000ñ - Look at the board. 4.Further practice: - Work in groups. - One is noughts (O) and the other 2,500ñ 500ñ 3,000ñ is Crosses (X). - Choose any words in the boxes, ask 4,800ñ 10,000ñ 1,000ñ and ask questions about prices : +How much is it / 1,200ñ 8,500ñ 5,000ñ are they? +It is 500ñ. + They are 10,000ñ. - Take notes and 5.Homework: memorize - Food and drink. - Do homework as - How much is it / are they ? the teacher It is / They are ................... suggests. - Exercises in the exercise book from page 43 to 46. - Unit 11: What do you eat? – AT THE CANTEEN - Lesson 6 : GRAMMAR PRACTICE.. …………………………………………………………………………………………………………… …………………………………………………………………………………………………………… …………………………………………………………………………………………………………….

(127) Week: 25 Period: 70 Date of planning: 22/01/2014 Date of teaching:. GRAMMAR PRACTICE. A.Objectives: 1.Knowledge: By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to further practice in like and dislike, countabilitiy, adjectives, question words, present Progressive, simple present and quantifiers. + Grammar: (structure) what would you like for …? + Vocabulary: : relating to B1, B2, B3 2.Skills: listening: listening, reading, writing 3.Behavior: B. Teaching aids: - Teacher: Textbook, lesson plan……. - Student: book, …. C. Steps of teaching: Teacher’s activities * Warm up: (5’) - Dialogue build. - Read the dialogue and write few key words on the board to help students remember what the two speaker in the dialogue say to each other . - Get students to write in the missing words on the board. - Ask students to write the missing words on the board. 1. Presentation: (10’) - Nought and crosses - Put the grid on the board. - Divide class into teams. One is noughts (O) and the other is Crosses (X). - Two teams choose any words in the boxes and ask questions about feelings . - The team which has three noughts or three crosses on a line will win the game. 2. Practice: (20’) - Pelmanism. - Stick 10 cards on the board so that the students can only see the numbers, make sure the words are mixed up. - Divide the slass into two teams and ask students to. Students’ activities. Content on the board 1.Present simple tense: teacher’s 8. Like. -Answer the question. - Look at the board and listen to the teacher carefully. - Reproduce the dialogue from the cues. - Build the dialogue until it is memorized. - Write in the missing words on the board.. a) - Do you ____ noodles? - Yes, I _____ noodles. - _____ you _____ rice? - No, ____ ____ ____ rice. b) - ____ she____ chicken? - Yes. She ____ chicken. - ____ she ____ fish? - No. She ____ ____ fish.. 2.A / an / some / any: - Look at the board. 1. any 3 5 - Work in groups. 3.ome - One is noughts (O) and 5. any the other is Crosses (X). 7. any 1 6 - Choose any words in 9. a the boxes, ask and ask questions about feelings : 7 4 +Do you have any bananas? +No, I don’t have any bana.. , but I have some oranges 3. Adjectives: - Look at the board. 1. tall - Listen to the teacher’s 6. thin explanation. 2.weak - Work in teams. 7. full - One of student in each 3. hot team chooses any two 8. short numbers. 4. fat. 8 2. any 4. some 6.some 8. some 2 9.

(128) choose two numbers. - Go on until the cards 9. strong - Go on until the cards are are turned over. 5.hungry turned over. 10 cold 4.Question words: * Lucky numbers - Write the numbers on the board. - Divide class into teams. The teams take turn to choose the numbers. - Tell students that they have to answer the questions .. - Look at the board. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 - Work in teams. 8 - Take turn to choose the 1 Lucky number. numbers. 7 - a Who - Listen to the teacher 2 - b What carefully. 8 - e Where - Answer the questions. 3 - d What 4 Lucky number. 5 - c How 6 Lucky number. 3. Production: (7’) 5. Present simple and present - Transformation drill - Remind Present simple progressive tense: - Ask students to remind and present progressive - S + Vs / es ………(every day) Present simple and present tense. - S + is / am / are + Ving… progressive tense. - Have to turn into a new (now) - Ask students to have to sentence using a) is eating d) is going turn into a new sentences progressive tense. b) are drinking e) is getting using present progressive c) is riding f) is traveling tense. * Homework: (3’) - Ask students to review vocabulary and Grammar points (Unit9 – Unit11) and exercises in the exercise book from Unit 9 to Unit 11 . - Have them prepare FORTY-FIVE MINUTE TEST * Self – evaluation:. 6.Homework: - Review vocabulary - Vocabulary and Grammar points and Grammar points (Unit9 – Unit11). (Unit9 – Unit11) and - Exercises in the exercise book exercises in the exercise from Unit 9 to Unit 11. book from Unit 9 to - FORTY-FIVE MINUTE TEST. Unit 11 . - Prepare FORTY-FIVE MINUTE TEST.. …………………………………………………………………………………………………………… …………………………………………………………………………………………………………… ……………………………………………………………………………………………………………. Week: 25 Period 71 The second written test ( Time: 45’) Date of planning: 22/01/2014 Date of teaching: A. Objectives: - Check the knowledge which has been learnt to know how well Sts know about the grammar, vocab, structures, understanding, - Sts do the test carefully, exactly,and clearly. B. New lesson. - Hand out the photocopies. - Ask Sts to master the test. §Ò a I.Hãy nghe và điền thông tin nghe đợc vào ô trống (2.0 điểm).

(129) 1- Lan would like some……….for breakfast. 2- Tuan is thirsty, he would like some ……. 3- An ice- cream is ………...dong 4- Hoang doesn’t have breakfast so he is ………...now. II.T×m 1 tõ kh«ng cïng nhãm trong c¸c c©u sau ( 1.0 ®iÓm ) 1. a.banana b.rice c.orange d.apple 2. a.eye b.hair c.orange juice d.nose 3. a.bottle b.banana c.packet d.tube 4. a.full b.thirty c.hungry d.short III.Hãy chọn 1 đáp án đúng nhất trong các đáp án sau để hoàn thành câu (2 điểm) 1. She has .......... lips A. long B. full C. short D. short 2.I am ............ I ‘d like some noodles . A. thirsty B. full C. tired D. hungry 3. There is........... water in the bottle . A. any B. some C. many D. a 4. She wants ............ cooking oil. A. a box of B. a dozen C. a bottle of D. a bottle 5. How .............eggs do you want ? A. any B. many C. much D. some 6. Is your mother’s hair long .......short ? A. and B. between C. with D. or 7. There aren’t ........... apples on the table. A. some B. any C. a D. an 8. ........... color is her hair ? _ It is black. A. How B. What C. When D. Where IV.Đọc kỹ đoạn văn sau và điền F vào ô trống nếu thông tin sai và T nếu thông tin là đúng (2.5 ®iÓm) Milk is a good drink .Fruit juice is also a good drink. Milk and fruit juice are very good for our health . Children should drink milk and fruit juice every day . They give us a lot of vitamins . Meat , fish and vegetables are necessary foods . We have meat , fish , vegetables and rice for lunch and dinner . 1. ______ Fruit juice is a good drink . 2. ______ We also need meat , fish , vegetables . 3. ______ Milk and fruit juice give us a lot of vitamins . 4. ______ Milk and fruit juices are good for children . 5. ______ Milk isn’t a good drink . V.S¾p xÕp c¸c tõ x¸o trén sau thµnh c©u hoµn chØnh (2.5 ®iÓm) 1. I’d/ for / like / noodles / some / breakfast ............................................................................................................................. 2. like / milk / I / would / some .............................................................................................................................. 3. Lan’s / is/ round / face ............................................................................................................................... 4.would / like / you / what / lunch / for ? ............................................................................................................................... 5. white / Mai/ / teeth / has. ............................................................................................................................................ I.Hãy nghe và điền thông tin nghe đợc vào ô trống (2.0 điểm) 1- Tuan is thirsty, he would like some ………... 2- Hoang doesn’t have breakfast so he is ………....now. 3- An ice- cream is ………...dong 4- Lan would like some……….....for breakfast. II.T×m 1 tõ kh«ng cïng nhãm trong c¸c c©u sau ( 1.0 ®iÓm ) 1. a.ice-cream b.hair c.eye. d.nose.

(130) 2. a.hungry b.thirty c.cold d.full 3. a.rice b.chicken c.orange d.water 4. a.banana b.rice c.orange d.apple III.Hãy chọn 1 đáp án đúng nhất trong các đáp án sau để hoàn thành câu (2 điểm) 1. ........... color is her hair ? _ It is black. A. How B. When C. What D. Where 2. She has .......... lips A. long B. full_ C. short D. heavy 3. Is your mother ‘s hair long .......short ? A. and B. or C. with D. between 4.I am ............ I ‘d like some noodles . A. thirsty B. hungry C. tired D. full 5. There aren’t ........... apples on the table. A. any B. some C. a D. an 6. There is........... water in the bottle . A. any B. some C. many D. a 7. She wants ............ cooking oil. A. a box of B. a dozen C. a bottle of D. a bottle 8. How .............eggs do you want ? A. any B. much C. many D. some IV.Đọc kỹ đoạn văn sau và điền F vào ô trống nếu thông tin sai và T nếu thông tin là đúng (2.5 ®iÓm) Milk is a good drink .Fruit juice is also a good drink. Milk and fruit juice are very good for our health . Children should drink milk and fruit juice every day . They give us a lot of vitamins . Meat , fish and vegetables are necessary foods . We have meat , fish , vegetables and rice for lunch and dinner . 1. ______ Milk is a good drink . 2. ______ Fruit juice isn’t a good drink . 3. ______ Milk and fruit juices are good for children . 4. ______ We also need meat , fish , vegetables . 5. ______ Milk and fruit juice give us a lot of vitamins . V.S¾p xÕp c¸c tõ x¸o trén sau thµnh c©u hoµn chØnh (2.5 ®iÓm) 1. white / She / / teeth / has. ............................................................................................................................. 2. Nga’s / is/ round / face .............................................................................................................................. 3. like / milk / I / would / some ............................................................................................................................... 4.would / like / you / what / breakfast / for ? ............................................................................................................................... 5. I’d/ for / like / noodles / some / breakfast. ............................................................................................................................................. Week: 25 UNIT 12: SPORTS AND PAST TIMES Period: 72 Secion: WHAT ARE YOU DOING? (A1,2,3) Date of planning: 10/02/2014 Date of teaching:.

(131) A. Objectives: 1.Knowledge: By the end, students might express what people are doing fluently. a) Vocabulary: - Swim, badminton, skip, volleyball, aerobics, tennis, jog, table tennis, sports b) structure - What are they doing? - They are swimming. - Which sports do you play? - I play ……………….. 2. Skills: listening, speaking, reading 3. Behavior: B. Teaching aids: - Teacher: textbook, Pictures and poster. - Students: textbook…………… C. Steps of teaching: Teacher’s activities * Warm up: ( 5’) - Hangman - Draw strokes on the board. Each stroke stands for a letter of the word. - The teacher draws a stroke if a student’s guess is not right. - The teacher gives the answer if they lose.. Pictur Pictur Picture Students’ activities Content ei ea b Revision: - Students take turn to guess the letters of the _ _ _ _ _ _ (sports) Pictur Pictur Picture words. g h c - e Give a eletter in the _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ (pastimes) alphabet. - Have to try to guess the Pictur Pictur Picture word. e f out the e eword. d - Find. 1. Presentation: (10’) Elicit vocabulary - Use pictures to introduce new words . - Have some students say the names of activities the teacher show.. - Listen and look at the 1 -Vocabulary pictures shown by the - to swim : bơi, loại teacher. - Try to say the names of - to play badminton : chơi activities shown. cầu lông - Write the new words in - to jog : đi bộ thể dục their notebooks. - to do aerobics : tập thể dục nhịp điệu - to play table tennis : chơi bóng bàn - to skip : nhảy dây - Students repeat chorally 1. Checking vocabulary: and remember all the English words. - Call the English words and write the English words if there is time.. - Rub out and remember - Point to the Vietnamese translations and rub out English words. - Get students to call the English words. - Try to help students to review the tenses : present simple and present progressive. 2. Practice: (20’) -Word cue drill - Run through the cues. - Hold up the first cues and say the model sentences. - What is he doing? - He is swimming. - Do the same for the. - Students remind the tenses : present simple and present progressive. - Look at the cues. - Listen to the teacher. - Repeat it chorally and then individually. - Make the sentence for themselves. - Practice in pairs. - Some pairs practice in. - He is swimmimg. - They are playing badminton. - She is skipping. - He / swim - She / do aerobics - They / play tennis - They / play soccer - He / jog - She / skip.

(132) * Self – evaluation: …………………………………………………………………………………………………… …………………………………………………………………………………………………… …………………………………………………………………………………………………… Week: 25 UNIT 12: SPORTS AND PAST TIMES Period: 73 Section: WHAT ARE YOU DOING? (A 4,5,R,B1,2) Date of planning: 10/02/2014 Date of teaching: A. Objectives: 1.Knowledge: By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to express what people are doing fluently. *Grammar: The simple present continues (review) *Vocabulary: : relating to a4-b-2 2. Language Skill: speaking , writing skills. 3. behavior: enjoy reading, speaking B.Teaching aids : 1. Teacher: Text book , pictures . 2. Student: bppk, notebook C. Steps of teaching:. Teacher’s activities * Warm up: (5’) - Hangman - Draw strokes on the board. Each stroke stands for a letter of the word. - The teacher draws a stroke if a student’s guess is not right. - The teacher gives the answer if they lose.. Pictur Students’ Pictur activities Picture Content ei ea b Revision: - Students take turn to guess letters of the _ _ _ _ _ _ (sports) Picturthe Pictur Picture words. eg eh c _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ (pastimes) - Give a letter in the alphabet. Pictur Pictur Picture - Have e f to trye eto guess the d word. - Find out the word.. 1. Presentation: (10’) - Elicit vocabulary - Use pictures to introduce new words . - Have some students say the names of activities the teacher show.. - Listen and look at the 1 -Vocabulary pictures shown by the - to swim : bơi teacher. - to play badminton : chơi - Try to say the names of cầu lông activities shown. - to jog : đi bộ thể dục - Write the new words in - to do aerobics : tập thể dục their notebooks. nhịp điệu - to play table tennis : chơi bóng bàn - to skip : nhảy dây - Rub out and remember - Students repeat chorally - Checking vocabulary: -Point to the Vietnamese and remember all the translations and rub out English words. English words. - Call the English words - Get students to call the and write the English English words. words if there is time. - Try to help students to - Students remind the review the tenses : present tenses : present simple. 2 .Presentation: - He is swimmimg. - They are playing.

(133) * Self – evaluation: …………………………………………………………………………………………………… …………………………………………………………………………………………………… …………………………………………………………………………………………………… Week:26 UNIT 12: SPORTS AND PASTIMES Period: 74 Section: FREE TIME ( B3,4,5,R ) Date of planning: 20/02/2014 Date of teaching: A. Objectives: 1.Knowledge: By the end of the lesson, students will be able to use “ How often..?”. + Grammar: how often …………? + Vocabulary: : relating to B3-r 2. Language Skill: speaking , writing skills. 3. Behavior: enjoy reading, speaking B,Teaching aids : 1. Teacher:Text book , pictures . 2. Student: book, notebook C. Steps of teaching: Teacher’s activities 1. Warm up: (5’) - Matching - Set the sence: What do you do in your free time? Now listen to the tape about What Tan/ Minh and Nam/ Lien /Lan and Mai do in their free time. - Run through the pictures. - Get students to match the names with the right pictures. 1. Presentation: (10’) Elicit vocabulary  Situation  Visual  Situation  Visual  Situation. Students’ activities - Answer theteacher’s questions. - Repeat after the teacher. - Match the names with the right pictures.. Content no the board B4 on page 128 - Tan -f - Minh and Nam. -e. - Lien. -a. - Lan and Mai. -b. 1-Vocabulary: - Listen to the teacher. - Once (adv) : một lần. - Repeat after the - Twice (adv) : hai lần teacher. - Three times: ba lần - Notice the main stress - a weeek : một tuần - How often …… : pattern. thường như thế nào. - Write the new words in their notebooks. a week Students repeat three times chorally and remember once all the words. how often - Go to the board and twice fill in the circles with the right words.. - What and where - Elicit the vocabulary from the students and write them in the circles. - Get students to repeat the words including the rubbed out words by pointing at the empty circle. - Ordering - Write a dialogue which is -. 2- Target language: Students read the - She goes joging..

(134) in wrong orders on the board. - Get students to listen to the tape then put the statements in the correct orders. - Get students to isolate the model sentences. - Let students copy the notes in their notebooks and memorize. 2. Practice: (20’) - Substitution drill - Get students to repeat the numbers (three, one, two……). - Three 1. Picture drill - Run through the pictures. - Hold up the first picture and say the model sentences: +How often does Ly watch TV? + She watches TV twice a week. - Do the same for the seccond picture. - Correct their mistakes. 2. Find someone who - Put the table on the board. - Get students to get into groups. - Get students to ask each other questions. + Teacher: How often do you play football? + Student (Nam): 3 times. - Correct if there are any mistakes. - Feedback. * Homework: (3’) - Ask students to learn adverbs of frequency. - Have them do exercise B1-5 in the exercise book and prepare Unit 12 – L5C1– C4: Reading and practising adverds of frequency with the simple present tense.. statements. - Listen to the tape then put the statements in the correct orders. - Isolate the model sentences - Copy the notes in the notebooks and memorize.. - How often does she listen to music? - She reads three times a week. - How often does Ly go joging? - She listen to music twice a week. - How often does she read? - How often + do / does + s + V…? - Once / twice / three times a week. - Thường như thế nào. - Hỏi về mức độ thường xuyeân.. 3. Practice: -Repeat the numbers - Three, one, two, four, five, seven. (three, one, two……). - B5 on page 129: - Three times. - play badminton / three times - Look at the pictures. - listen to music / twice - Listen to the teacher. - go joging / once - Repeat it chorally and - play tennis / once then individually. - watch TV / twice - Make the sentence for - read / three times themselves. - go to the movies / twice - Practice in pairs. - Some pairs practice in front.. - Look at the board. 4.Further practice: - Work in groups. - Stand up and ask each How often do Times orther questions. When you..? they find someone who …play football 3 times says “Yes” they fill in …go to the park the name. They can’t …watch TV fill in someone’s name …play more than once. badminton - Tell the teacher what …do homework they have found, e.g. …read Nam plays football three tiomes a week - Take notes and memorize - Do homework as the teacher suggests.. Name Nam. 5.Homework: - Adverbs of frequences. - How much is it / are they ? It is / They are ................... - Exercise B1-5 in the exercise book. - Unit 12: Sports And Pastimes – HOW OFTEN……? - Lesson 5 : C1– C4.

(135) * Self – evaluation: …………………………………………………………………………………………………… …………………………………………………………………………………………………… …………………………………………………………………………………………………… Week: 26 Period : 75 Date of planning: 20/02/2014 Date of teaching:. CORRECT THE TEST. A. Objectives: - By the end of the period, ps know how to do to improve their knowledge and have plan to revise old grammar. B. Language contents: - Review C. Techniques: - Elicit and guild. D. Teaching aids: - Test sheet E. Procedures: Teacher’s activities 1). Warm up: - How are you to day? - What the date? - Who’s absent?. Ps’ activities - Answer teacher’s questions. 2) Correct the test: - Teacher asks ps to do sentence by - Do as the teacher asks. sentence. - Teacher corrects and explains in - Copy. each sentence. - Review for ps grammar and words.. 4) Consolidation: 5- Home work: - Prepare for unit 12: lesson 1. - At home.. Contents I. Listening 1. 11 2. 20 3. 15 4. 30 5. 50 6. 12 7. 22 8. 43 II. Choose the best answer 1/ B 2/ A 3/ D 4/ B 5/ A 6/ B 7/ D 8/ D III. Reading 1. F 2. F 3. T 4. F IV. Writing 1- I am in class 2- I get up at….. 3- I…….. 4- There are……...

(136) * Self – evaluation: …………………………………………………………………………………………………………… …………………………………………………………………………………………………………… ……………………………………………………………………………………………………………. Week: 27 UNIT 12: SPORTS AND PASTIMES Period: 76 Section: HOW OFTEN ? (C1,2,3) Date of planning: 27/02/2014 Date of teaching: I. Objectives: 1.Knowledge: By the end of the lesson, students can understand details and use adverbs of frequency correctly. + Grammar: how often …………? Always. usually ,often… + Vocabulary: : relating to section C1-3 2. Language Skill: speaking , writing skills 3. Behavior: II. Teaching aids : 1. Teacher: Text book , pictures . 2. Student: book, notebook III. Steps of teaching: Teacher’s activities * Warm up: (5’) Nought and crosses - Put the grid on the board. - Divide class into teams. One is noughts (O) and the other is Crosses (X). - Two teams choose any words in the boxes and ask questions about activities . - The team which has three noughts or three crosses on a line will win the game. 1. Presentation: (10’) - Elicit vocabulary - Use signs to introduce new words : VVVV – VVV – VV – V – X.. Students’ activities - Look at the board. - Work in groups. - One is noughts (O) and the other is Crosses (X). - Choose any words in the boxes, ask and ask questions about activities : +read books. +How often do you read books? +Twice a week. - Listen to teacher . - Repeat after the teacher. - Notice the Vietnamese translation.. Content on the board. swim. read books. play tennis. go to school. play soccer. do homework. watch tv. listen to music. play badminto n. 1-Vocabulary: - Always (adv) : luôn luôn. - Usually (adv) : thường thường - Often (adv) : thường hay - Sometimes (adv) : thỉnh thoảng. - Never (adv) : không bao giờ.

(137) - Slap the board - Put the signs on the board. - Call two students of two teams to the front of the class. - Call out one of adverbs in English in loud voice. 2. Practice: (20’) - Guessing meaning - Ask students to use the pictures and read the text to match the Vietnamese with the new vocabulary in context. - Grid - Put the table on the board. - Get students to reread the text then complete the table. - Get students to share the answers with their partners. - Feed back - Answer given - Ask students to ask questions and answer: + How often do they go to the zoo? + They sometimes go to the zoo. 3. Production: (7’) - Writing - Have students write about activities in their free time using adverbs of frequency: always, usually, often, sometimes, never .. * Homework: (3’) - Ask students to learn by heart advebs of frequency and “How. - Copy in their notebook. - Group works. - Say the signs in English . - Run forward and slap the correct signss on the board. - Students have slapped all the numbers.. VVV VVVV VV V X. 2-While reading: - Students read the text and use the pictures to match the Vietnamese with the new vobulary. - Read the table on the board. - Read the text again and complete the table. - Share their answer with their partners.. 1. tha dieu 2. cai lieu 3. di cam trai 4. di da ngoai How often zoo park picnic sports camp school homew o kite. ne v. = = = = so m V. fly a kite. a tent go camping have a picnic. of t. us u. a l. V V V V V V V. - Ask and answer the questions... - Write about activities in their free time. - Write individually and then share with their partners.. - Take notes and memorize - Do as the teacher requests.. 3 -Post reading: I often go to the zoo. I never……………… ………………………………………………………… … ………………………………………………………… … ………………………………………………………… … ………………………………………………………… … 4-.Homework: - Adverbs of frequency. - How often …………………………? I always / usually / often / smetimes...

(138) often ……………………?”. - Have them prepare Unit 12 - Lesson 6: (C5-6) : Reading and further practice in Vs/adv.. - Unit 12: Sparts And Pastimes – HOW OFTEN? - Lesson 6 : (C5-6). * Self – evaluation: …………………………………………………………………………………………………… …………………………………………………………………………………………………… …………………………………………………………………………………………………… Week: 27 UNIT 12: SPORTS AND PASTIMES Period: 77 Section: HOW OFTEN ? (C4,5,6,R) Date of planning: 27/02/2014 Date of teaching: I. Objectives: 1.Knowledge: At the end, students can understand the text and use adverbs of frequency more fluently. + Grammar: how often …………? + Vocabulary: : relating to C4-R 2. Language Skill: speaking , writing skills 3. Behavior: II. Teaching aids : 1. Teacher: Text book , pictures . 2. Student: book, notebook III. Steps of teaching: Teacher’s activities * Warm up: (5’) - Prediction - Explain the listening exercise and introduce the content of this exercise. - Let them listen to the cassette and match the adverbs with appropriate pictures as requested. - Let them listen again to correct their exercise. 1. Presentation: (10’) - Elicit vocabulary Situation Visual Explanation. Students’ activities - Listen to the teacher’s planation and introduce. - Listen to the cassette and do the exercise.. Content on the board a) - never b) - sometimes c) - often d) - often e) - usually. - Listen again and check the answer.. - Listen to teacher . - Repeat after the teacher. - Notice the Vietnamese translation. - Copy in their notebook.. 1-Vocabulary: - to wear clothes / boots : mặc quần áo / mang giày . - a stove : lò, bếp. - overnight : qua đêm..

(139) - Rub out and remember -Point to the Vietnamese translations and rub out English words. - Get students to call the English words. - Brainstorm -Set up the sence: What do Minh and his friends do on the weekend? - Ask students to think of town and the country. - Get them to go to the board and write down their ideas. - Give feedback. 2. Practice: (20’) - Get students to read the text and check.. - Students repeat chorally and remember all the English words. - Call the English words and write the English words if there is time. - Students to think of the town and country. - Go to the board and write down their idea.. * Checking vocabulary:. ride a bike fly a kite. have a picnic play game Pastimes in the country go to the mountain go camping go to the river. 2.While reading: - Read the text and - go walking in the mountains check. - wear strong boots, warm clothes. - take food, water and camping stoves - camp overnight. - Look at the board. Reading comprehension - Lucky numbers - Work in teams. 1 2 3 4 - Write the numbers on - Take turn to choose 5 the board. the numbers. 6 7 8 9 - Divide class into - Listen to the teacher 10 teams. The teams take carefully. 1 - b What do they always wear?. turn to choose the - Answer the questions. 3 - f What do they take? numbers. 5 - c When does he go? - Tell students that they 6 - a What does Minh like doing? have to answer the 8 - e Where does he often go? questions . 10 - d Who does he usually go with? 2 – 4 – 7 – 9 : Lucky numbers 3. Production: (7’) - Write the text again by 3-.Post reading: -Transformation writing changing “ Minh” to C6 , page 132 - Have students rewrite “I”. I like walking. On the weekend, I……… the text by changing - Write individually and ………………………………… “Minh… to … I... then share with their ………………………………… partners. * Homework: (3’) - Take notes and 4-.Homework: - Ask students to learn memorize - Adverbs of frequency and vocab. by heart advebs of - Do as the teacher - Simple present tense. frequency and Simple requests. - Unit 13: Activities And The Season – present tense. THE WEATHER AND SEASONS - Have them prepare Lesson 1 : (A1) Unit 13 - Lesson 1: (A1) : Seasons vocabulary with“weather like”.

(140) * Self – evaluation: …………………………………………………………………………………………………… …………………………………………………………………………………………………… …………………………………………………………………………………………………… Week: 27 UNIT 13: ACTIVITIES AND THE SEASONS Period: 78 Section: THE WEATHER AND SEASONS (A 1-2) Date of planning: 27/02/2014 Date of teaching: I. Objectives: 1.Knowledge: By the end of the lesson, Students can talk about the seasons and the weather. + Grammar: what’s the waether like…………..? + Vocabulary: : relating to A1-2 2. Language Skill: speaking , writing skills 3. Behavior: II. Teaching aids : 1. Teacher: Text book , pictures . 2. Student: book, notebook III. Steps of teaching: Teacher’s activities * Warm up: (5’) -Jumbled words -Write numbers whose letters are in disorder. - Divide the class into two teams. - Ask students from each team to go to the board and write the correct words . 1. Presentation: (10’) - Elicit vocabulary  Situation  picture  Situation  Visual  Situation  Explanation  Situation  // - Ordering - Write new words which are in wrong orders on the board. - Get students to listen to the tape then put the statements in the correct orders by numbering. - Presentation text. Students’ activities -Look at the board. - Listen to the teacher. - Work in teams. - Go to the board and write the correct words. (One word, one student).. Content on tha board - oht = hot - codl. =. cold. - like. =. like. - whta. =. what. 1-Vocabulary: - The spring : mùa xuân. - Listen to the teacher. - The summer: mùa hạ - Repeat after the teacher. - The fall : muà thu. - Notice the main stress - The winter : mùa đông. pattern. - The seasons : mùa. - Write the new words in - The weather : thời tiết their notebooks. - Warm (adj) : ấm áp. - Cool (adj) : mát mẻ. - Students new words The winter/ the fal/. cool which are in wrong order. / warm/. seasons /. the spring - Listen to the tape then /. the weather / the summer number them.. 2- Model sentences.

(141) - ask students to read the sentences in A1 on page 134 to isolate the model senetences: + What’s the weather like in the summer? 2. Practice: (20’) - Word cue drill - Run through the cues. - Hold up the first cues and say the model sentences. - What’s the weather like in the summer? - It’s hot in the summer. - Do the same for the second cue. - Correct their mistakes. 3. Production: (7’) -Substitution Boxes - Put students into four groups ( one for each eason) an each group makes a poster. - Example: - In the spring +The afternoon is warm but the evening is cool. + The rice is green. + The trees are beautiful. * Homework: (3’) - Ask students to learn seasons vocabulary and how to talk about the weather. - Have them prepare Unit 13 -- L5- A3: Talking about what weather you like.. - Read the sentences to - What’s the weather like in the isolate the model summer? sentences: - It’s hot + it’s hot in the summer. - Copy the notes in the notebooks and memorize. - Look at the cues. - Listen to the teacher. - Repeat it chorally and then individually. - Make the sentence for themselves. - Practice in pairs. - Some pairs practice in front.. - What’s the weather like ……? - It’s ……………. . . - Thời tiết …………………ra sao?. - Hỏi về thời tiết. . 3. Practice: - hot / summer - cold / winter - warm / spring - cool / fall. 4. Further practice: - Students work in four groups. Each group makes a poster. - Listen to the teacher. - In the spring. The ……………… - In the summer. The ……………… - In the fall. The………………. Take notes and memorize - Do as the teacher suggests.. rice hot and moutain green river the night morning warm yellow is beautiful cold evening cool trees blue weather gray hot flowers afternoon house tall very 5.Homework: - Seasons vocabulary. - What’s the weather like ? It’s ................... - Unit 13: Activities And The Seasons – THE WEATHER AND SEASONS - Lesson 2 : A3. * Self – evaluation: …………………………………………………………………………………………………… …………………………………………………………………………………………………… …………………………………………………………………………………………………… Duyệt của BGH. Duyệt của tổ trưởng.

(142) Week:28 UNIT 13: ACTIVITIES AND THE SEASONS Period: 79 Section: THE WEATHER AND SEASONS (A3,4,R) Date of planning: 27/02/2013 Date of teaching: I. Objective: 1. Knowledge: By the end of the lesson ,ss will be able to talk about your favorite weather *Grammar: what weather do you like…………..? *Vocabulary: : relating to A4-R 2. Language Skill: speaking , writing skills 3. Behavior: II. Teaching aids : 1. Teacher: Te-xt book , pictures . 2. Student: book, notebook III. Steps of teaching: Teacher’s activities Students’ activities Content on the board * Warm up: (5’) - Brainstorm Pastimes - Set up the sence: What do Minh - Students to think of the listen to music and his friends do on the town and country. go for a walk weekend? - Go to the board and fly a kite - Ask students to think of town write down their idea. watch TV and the country. play badmint - Get them to go to the board and go swimming write down their ideas. play video games - Give feedback..

(143) 1. Presentation: (10’) - Set the scene: You are going to read a short passage about Ba. Guess what Ba does in different weather. (hot, cold, cool and warm) - Let students read the text themselves. - Ask some students some questions and let them answer loudly. - Point to the questions and get students to isolate the model sentences . 2. Practice: (20’) * Word cue drill - Run through the cues. - Hold up the first cues and say the model sentences. - What do you do when it’s cold? - I go jogging when it’s cold. - Do the same for the second cue. - Correct their mistakes. 3. Production: (7’) - Get students to change the text about Ba and write about themselves. - Get students to swrap books, read their partners’ texts, then write about What their partners do in different weather.. - Listen to the teacher. - Guess what Ba does in different weather. - Students give their predictions. - Read the text. -Answer the teacher’s questoins. - Give the form, meaning and use.. - Look at the cues. - Listen to the teacher. - Repeat it chorally and then individually. - Make the sentence for themselves. - Practice in pairs. - Some pairs practice in front. - Students change the text about Ba and write about themselves. - Swrap books, read their partners’ texts, then write about What their partners do in different weather.. 2.Prediction a. hot ? b. cold ? c. cool d. warm ? 3. Model sentences What+do/does+S+ do+ when it’s….? When it’s…, S + V……….. - ……làm gì khi thời tieát……………? - Hoûi ai laøm gì vaøo thôìø tieát nào đó . 4. Practice: - cold / go jogging - cool / do aerobics - hot / go swimming - warm / go to the park. 5. Further practice: 3. A4, page 136 a. When it’s hot, I ………… When it’s hot, I …………… When it’s hot, I …………… When it’s hot, I …………… b. When it’s hot, he / she … When it’s hot, he / she … When it’s hot, he / she … When it’s hot, he / she …. * Homework: (3’) - Ask students to learn seasons - Take notes and memorize - Seasons vocabulary. vocabulary and how to talk about - Do as the teacher -What +do /does+S+do+ their favorite activities in suggests. when it’s…? different weather. - When it’s ………………, S - Have them prepare Unit 13 – + V……………. L4- B1: Adverbs of frequency, - Unit 13: Activities And Presnt simple………. The Seasons – ACTIVITIES IN SEASONS - Lesson 4: B1 * Self – evaluation: ………………………………………………………………………………………………………………… ………………………………………………………………………………………………………………… ………………………………………………………………………………………………………………….

(144) Week: 28 UNIT 13: ACTIVITIES AND THE SEASONS Period: 80 Section: ACTIVITIES IN SEASONS (B1) Date of planning: 27/02/2013 Date of teaching: I. Objective: 1. Knowledge: By the end of the lesson , ss will be able to practice in adverbs of frequency *Grammar: what waether do you like…………..? *Vocabulary: : relating to B1 2. Language Skill: speaking , writing skills 3. Behavior: II. Teaching aids : 1. Teacher: Text book , pictures . 2. Student: book, notebook III. Steps of teaching: Teacher’s activities * Warm up: (5’) * Matching - Write adverbs of frequency and signs on the board. - Get students to come up to the board then match items in the left with items in the rihgt.. Students’ activities - Look at the board. - Work in teams - Come up to the board then match items in the left with items in the right.. Content on the board - always vv - usually vvvv - often x - sometimes vvv - never v. 1. Presentation: (10’) 1- Vocabulary: - use picture b and e to - Look at the picture - to play basketball: chơi bong gổ present new words. and say the words in - to go sailing: đi bơi thuyền English. 2-Model sentences - Show the picture and Answer the -What do you do in the spring? ask students : teacher’s question -They often play volleyball in the + What do they do in + They often play spring. the in the spring? volleyball in the -What+do /does+S+ do+ in + ….? - Let students copy the spring. - S + Adverbs + V + ………. notes in their notebooks - copy the notes in - ………laøm gì vaøo……………? and memorize. the notebooks and - Hỏi ai làm gì vào mùa nào đó . memorize. 2. Practice: (20’) 3. Practice: *Answer given - We often go fishing in the fall. - Put the sentences on the - Read the sentences. - They usually play volleyball in the board. - Listen to the winter. - Get students to ask teacher. - She sometimes flies a kite in spring. questions and answer. - Repeat it chorally - He never reads books in summer. +What do you do in the and then fall? individually. + We often go fishing. Make the - Do the same for the questions . second cue. - Practice in pairs. - Correct their mistakes. - Some pairs practice in front. 4. Further practice: 3. Production: (7’).

(145) Lucky numbers - Write the numbers on the board. - Divide class into teams. The teams take turn to choose the numbers. - Tell students that they have to answer the questions .. - Look at the board. - Work in teams. - Take turn to choose the numbers. - Listen to the teacher carefully. Answer the questions.. 1 5 7 11. 2 6 8 12. 3. 4. 9. 10. 1.What ‘s the weather like in the winter? 2.What do you usually do in the fall? 3.What do you usually eat in the winter? 5.What’s the weather like in the spring? 7.Where do you usually do in the sum…? 10.What’s the weather like in the fall? Lucky numbers :4 - 6 - 8 - 9 - 11 - 12 : * Homework: (3’) - Take notes and 5.Homework: memorize - Seasons vocabulary. - Ask students to learn - Do as the teacher -What +do /does+S+do+ in ……………? seasons vocabulary and suggests. - S + always / usually / often…………… how to talk about they - Unit 13: Activities And The Seasons – often do in seasons. ACTIVITIES IN SEASONS - Lesson 5: B2 - Have them prepare Unit 13 L5-B2:Writing about activities you do in different seasons. * Self – evaluation: ………………………………………………………………………………………………………………… ………………………………………………………………………………………………………………… …………………………………………………………………………………………………………………. Week: 28 UNIT 13: ACTIVITIES AND THE SEASONS Period: 81 Section: ACTIVITIES IN SEASONS (B2,R) Date of preparing: 27/02/2013 Date of teaching: I. Objectives: 1. Knowledge: By the end of the lesson , ss will be able totalk and write about things you do in the different seasons. + Grammar: what do you do in …………..? + Vocabulary: : relating to B2-R 1. Skills: speaking , writing skills 2. Behavior: II. Teaching aids : 1. Teacher: - Text book , pictures . 2. Student: book, notebook III. Steps of teaching. Teacher’s activities * Warm up: (5’) Networks - Write a network on the board and put some more words below it. - Get students to think of activities they do in seasons.. Students’ activities. Content on the board. Watch TV go - Students to think of the fishing town and country. read books Seasons - Go to the board and fill in the remaining empty circles winter summer with their own words. go jogging do earobics have a.

(146) - Get students to put the given words in the appropriate circles - Give feedback. Survey - Have them tell about themselves and talk to their friends about their activities. - Let them practice with their partners: + Which season do you like? + Fall. + What’s the weather like in the fall? + It’s cool. + Where do you usually go? + to the mountain + What do you usually do there? + I go camoing with my friends + What do you usually eat or drink? + We usually take a picnic and a lot of hot drink. - Feedback. Write it up - Ask Students to write about the friends they have interviewed using 3rd person singular. - Correct their mistakes.. picnic. - Try to tell about their activities and ask their friends about theirs. - Practice with partners. - Tell the teacher what they have asked their partner, e.g.“Hoai swims. She plays volleyball and table tennis………” 2.Pre writing: (10’) Nam e. Sea-. Hoa i. Fal l. son. Weather. Usually go. Usaully do. Usual-ly eat / drink. Cool. the mou. go camp. a picni hot drink. 3. While writing: (20’) - Students write about the friends they have interviewed Hoai like the fall when the using 3rd person singular. weather is cool. She usually go - Write individually. campingin the mountain with their friends. They take a picnic and a lot of hot drink. 4. Post writing: (7’). - Correct their writings. - Choose some writing and correct on the board. * Homework: (3’) - Ask students to write their activities in their notebook. - Have them do exercises in the workbook from page 106 to 111 prepare Unit 14 – L1- A1-3: “Going to” future. * Self – evaluation:. - Share their writings. - Write some on the board. 5.Homework: - Take notes and memorize - Writing. - Do as the teacher suggests. - Exercises in the workbook from page 106 to 111. - Unit 14: Making Plans – VACATION DESTINATIONS Lesson 1: A1 - 3.

(147) ………………………………………………………………………………………………………………… ………………………………………………………………………………………………………………… ………………………………………………………………………………………………………………… Duyệt của BGH. Duyệt của tổ trưởng. Week: 29 UNIT 14: MAKING PLANS Period: 82 Section: VACATION DESTINATIONS (A1,2,3) Date of preparing: 13/03/2014 Date of teaching: A. Objectives: 1. Knowledge:By the end of the lesson , The student learn how to speak and write about their summer vacation ask – answer about their vacation plans. + Grammar: what are you going …...................? + Vocabulary: : relating to A1-3 2. Skill: speaking , writing skills 3. Behavior: B. Teaching aids : 1. Teacher:- Text book , pictures . 2. Student: book, notebook C. Steps of teaching:.

(148) Teacher’s activities Students’ activities * Warm up: (5’) Chatting - Ask students some questions Answer the teacher’s about their activities in seasons. questions about their - Teacher – whole class. activities. - Students – Teacher. 1. Presentation: (10’) Elicit vocabulary  Translation - Listen to the teacher.  Picture - Repeat after the teacher.  Translation - Notice the main stress  Situation pattern.  Situation - Write the new words in  Translation their notebooks. - Rub out and remember -Point to the Vietnamese translations and rub out English words. - Get students to call the English words. - Presentation dialogue - Show students the dialogue. - Let them listen to the tape. - Ask them to play the roles of Ba and Lan. - Ask students to isolate the model sentence by Asking them some questions; + What is Ba going to do this summer vacation? + I am going to visit Hue. + Where is he going to stay? + He is going to stay with his aunt nad uncle. 2. Practice: (20’) - Answer given - Put the sentences on the board. - Get students to ask questions and answer. +What are you going to do ? + I am going to visit Hue. - Do the same for the second cue. - Correct their mistakes.. Content on the board - What do you do in the spring? - Do you usually go camping? - Where do you often go ?. 1- Vocabulary: - The summer vacation: kì nghỉ hè - The citadel: thaønh noäi. - to stay with someone: ở với ai……… - Uncle: chuù, baùc. - Aunt: cô, dì. - to visit: thaêm vieáng. - Students repeat chorally and - Checking vocabulary: remember all the English words. - Call the English words and write the English words if there is time. - Students read the dialogue * A1 on page 140 in A2 on page 116 again . + What is Ba going to do - Make the questions to this summer vacation? isolate the model sentence: + I am going to visit Hue. -How much beef do you + Where is he going to want? stay? -How many eggs do you + He is going to stay with want? his aunt nad uncle. Form: - Wh + be + S + going to + V…………? - S + be + going to + V …………………… - Be going to : seõ. - Diễn tả một dự định. 2. Practice: - Read the sentences. - I am going to visit Hue. - Listen to the teacher. - I am going to stay with - Repeat it chorally and then my aunt individually. and uncle. - Make the questions . - Practice in pairs. - I am goig to stay there for - Some pairs practice in front. a week. - I am goig to visit the citadel.. 3. Production:(7’) 3-Further practice: -Mapped dialogue - Put the dialogue on the board - Look at the board and listen Lan Mai.

(149) which is only words. The words are cues. - Model the dialogue. - Run through the cues like a drill with the whole class.. to the teacher. - Repeat after the teacher. - Practice the dialogue in pair . - Some pairs practice in front. - Rewrite the dialogue .. . . -What / Ha Long S.Vac? Bay. - Where / a hotel. stay? 2 weeks. - How long? Visit / -What / do ? beach / - HCM city. swim. And you?. * Homework: (3’) - Ask students to learn - Take notes and memorize - Vocabulary. vocabulary and how to talk - Do as the teacher suggests. +Wh + be + S + going to + about vacation plans. V…………? - Have them prepare Unit 14 S + be + going to + V L2-A4-5:Reading a text and …………………… sequencing words: first, then, - Unit 14: Making Plans – next, after that and finally. VACATION DESTINATIONS - Lesson 2: A 4 - 5 * Self – evaluation: ………………………………………………………………………………………………………………… ………………………………………………………………………………………………………………… ………………………………………………………………………………………………………………… Week: 29 Period: 83 Date of preparing: 13/03/2014 Date of teaching:. UNIT 14: MAKING PLANS Section : VACATION DESTINATIONS (A 4,5,R). A. Objectives: 1. Knowledge:By the end of the lesson , about vacation plans to understand the details and practice going to future and sequencing words: first, then, ……. + Grammar: what are you going …...................? + Vocabulary: : relating to A4-R 2. Language Skill: speaking , writing skills 3. Behavior: B. Teaching aids : 1. Teacher:- Text book , pictures . 2. Student: books, notebook C. Steps of teaching: Teacher’s activities * Warm up: (5’) Chatting - Ask students some questions about their activities in seasons. - Teacher – whole class. 1. Presentation: (10’) Elicit vocabulary  Situation  Visual. Students’ activities. Content on the board. - Answer the teacher’s questions about their activities. - Students – Teacher.. - What’s the weather like? - What weather do you like? - What are you going to do this summer vacation ?. - Listen to teacher . - Repeat after the teacher.. 1- Vocabulary: - The beach : bãi biển - a temple : ñình mieáu. - first (adv) : trước tiên.

(150) - Notice the Vietnamese - Then (adv) : kế đó translation. - Copy in their notebook. - Rub out and remember - Students repeat chorally * Checking vocabulary: -Point to the Vietnamese and remember all the translations and rub out English words. English words. - Call the English words - Get students to call the and write the English English words. words if there is time. - Ordering - Nha Trang - Set the sence: Phuong and - Listen to the - HCM city Mai are going to visit the teacher. - Ha Noi five places. Can you guess - Guess where they - Ha Long Bay where they are going to visit are going to visit - Hue fisrt, then , next, after that fisrt, then , next, and finally? after that and finally. 2. Practice: (20’) 2.While reading: - Get students to read the - Read the text and check. - First: Ha Long Bay. text and check. - Then: Ha Noi. -Next: Hue - After that: Nha Trang.  . Translation //. - Finally: Ho Chi Minh City. - Grid - Put the table on the board. - Get students to reread the text then complete the table. - Get students to share the answers with their partners. - Feed back. - Read the table on the board. - Read the text again and complete the table. - Share their answer with their partners.. - Answer given - Ask students to ask - Ask and answer the questions and answer: questions. + Where are they goig to - Work in pairs. visit? + They are going to visit Ha Long Bay + Where are they going to stay? + They are going to stay their uncle and aunt.. Ho w long. Place s. Where. Ha Long. with 2 uncle & days aunt. Ha Noi. hotel. Hue. with friends. Nha Trang. friend’s house. HCM City. grandparent’ s. 3. Production: (7’) - Transformation writing - Have students use the same grid headings but this time fill it with their own plans for the summer vacation. *.Homework: (3’). - Fill it with their own plans for the summer vacation . - Write individually and then share with their partners.. 4.Post reading:. - Ask students to learn by. - Take notes and. - Vocabulary.. What. visit Ha Long Bay see 3 Ngoc days Son Temple 2 see the days citadel Go to 3 Nha days Trang Beach Visit one grandwee parent k s.

(151) heart vocabulary and memorize - Sequencing words. Sequencing words. - Do as the teacher - Unit 14: Making Plans – FREE - Have them prepare Unit requests. TIME PLANS - Lesson 3 : (B1 - 3) 14 - Lesson 3: (B1-3) : Asking about others’ projects * Self – evaluation: ………………………………………………………………………………………………………………… ………………………………………………………………………………………………………………… ………………………………………………………………………………………………………………… Week:29 Period: 84 Date of preparing: 13/03/2014 Date of teaching:. UNIT 14: MAKING PLANS. Section: FREE TIME PLANS (B1,2,3). A. Objectives: 1. Knowledge: By the end of the lesson ,ss will be able to Further listening practice with “going to ” to talk about plans for the near future + Grammar: what are you going …...................? + Vocabulary: : relating to B1-3 2. Language Skill: speaking , writing skills 3. Behavior: B. Teaching aids : 1. Teacher:- Text book , pictures . 2. Student: book, notebook C. Steps of teaching: Teacher’s activities * Warm up: (5’) - Finding friends Put a table on the board. Ask students to work in groups Ask them to match the verbs with the nouns to make phrases. + See my friend. a. Board drill Get students to use finding friend as cues to ask questions and answer. 1. Presentation: (10’) Predict dialogue Set the scene: Lan and Tuan are talking about their near future plans - Put the dialogue on the board. Some of the. Students’ activities Look at the board. Students work in groups Match the verbs with the nouns to make phrases. Work in pairs. Ask questions and answer.. - Listen to the teacher. -Answer the teacher’s questoins. - Read the dialogue. - Guess what the. Content on the board H w. M. F v. S. M v. M v v. B m. M. W k. see v play v do v visit v v help v v go v wal v v k + What are you going to do tomorrow? + I’m going to do my homework. 1- Dialouge Build Tuan: What are you going to do tonight? Lan: I’m going to (1) _________ . Tuan: What are you going to do tomorrow? Lan: It’s Sunday. I’m going to (2)_____. Then we are going to (3)______. What about you? Tuan : Tonight, I’m going to (4) _____ ..

(152) words are missing. - Ask students to guess what the missing words are. + What is Lan / Tuan going to do to tonight / tomorrow? 2. Practice: (10’) - Get students to read the dialogue (B1, page 144) and check. - Substitution drill - Explain how to do the exercises. - Let them practice in pairs. - Call some pairs to check and correct their mistakes. Mapped dialogue - Put the dialogue on the board which is only words. The words are cues. - Model the dialogue. - Run through the cues like a drill with the whole class. 3. Production: (7’) - Chain game - Write the phrases on the board. - Ask students to get into groups of four or five. - Do the model.. * Homework: - Ask students to learn by heart activities and “Be going to” to talk about the near future. - Have them prepare Unit 14 - Lesson 4: (B5-6) : Further listening and reading pracftice with “Going to”.. missing words are. - Students give their predictions. + He / She is going to ………. Tomorrow I’m going to (5)______ .. 2- Practice - Read the dialogue Lan: Tonight- do homework. and check. Tomorrow- visit-see a movie. - Lis ten to the Tuan: Tonight- play badminton. teacher. Tomorrow- watch a soccer match. - Practice with B2 –page 144 partners. a) tonight: see a movie - Correct the tomorrow: go walking exercises and write in b) tonight: help my mom the notebooks. tomorrow: play volleyball - Look at the board b. B4 – page 144 and listen to the teacher. - Repeat after the Nga Ba teacher.   - Practice the What/weekend see a movie dialogue in pair . ? Sao Mai. - Some pairs practice Which/theater? Jurassic Park. in front. What / see? I / not / know - Rewrite the It/ good dialogue if there is movie? time . 3.Further practice - On Saturday morning, I’m going to… - On Saturday afternoon, I’m going to… - On Saturday evening, I’m going to… - On Suday morning, …………………… - On Suday afternoon, ………………… - Look at the board - On Suday evening, …………………… - Get into groups of four or five. - Listen to the teacher. - Play games. - Take notes and memorize - Do as the teacher requests.. - Activities. - Be going to (near future). - Unit 14: Making Plans – FREE TIME PLANS - Lesson 4 : (B5 - 6).

(153) * Self – evaluation: ………………………………………………………………………………………………………………… ………………………………………………………………………………………………………………… ………………………………………………………………………………………………………………… Week: 30 Period: 85 Date of planning: 13/03/2014 Date of teaching:. UNIT 14: MAKING PLANS Section: FREE TIME PLANS ( B4,5,6,R ). A. Objectives: 1. Knowledge:By the end of the lesson , about vacation plans to understand the details and practice going to future and sequencing words: first, then, ……. + Grammar: what are you going …...................? + Vocabulary: : relating to A4-R 2. Skill: speaking , writing skills 3. Behavior: B. Teaching aids : 1. Teacher:- Text book , pictures . 2. Student: books, notebook C. Steps of teaching: Teacher’s activities 1. Warm up: (5’) - Survey. Students’ activities. - Try to tell about their - Have them tell about activities and ask their themselves and talk to their friends about theirs. friends about their - Practice with partners. activities. - Tell the teacher what - Let them practice with they have asked their their partners: partner, + What are you going to e.g: Nam is going see his do tonight? friend tonight. He’s + I’m going to do my going to have a picnic on homework. Saturday. On Sun day, - Feedback. He’s going to play volleyball. He’s going to visit Ha Noi in the summer vacation.. 2. Presentation: (10’) Elicit vocabulary Translation Visual Translation Pre Questions c. Set the sence: Minh and his friends are going to have a. Content on the board. tonight. on Satur -day?. on Sun day. in the sum mer vaca tion. Me. do home -work. Part -ner 1 Part -ner 2 - Listen to teacher . 1-Vocabulary: - Repeat after the teacher. - to bring(v): mang - Notice the Vietnamese - a camera(n): m¸y ¶nh translation. - to take a photo: chôp ¶nh - Copy in their notebook. Where are they going to visit? - Read the questions and What three things are they going to answer. bring? What are they going to to there?.

(154) picnic.Read the questions and answer. 3. Practice: (20’) - Get students to check their predicted answers. e. Brainstorm - Set up the sence: Vui and her four friends are planning a camping. Guess what they are going to bring. - Ask students to think of things they are going to bring. - Get them to go to the board and write down their ideas. - Give feedback. - Let students lissten to the tape and check their predictions. - Students check their predicted answers. - Listen to the teacher. - Students to think of things Vui and her friends are going to bring. - Go to the board and write down their idea.. - Students listen to the tape and check their predictions.. 2-Reading: d. Answers - near a lake - take photos - a camera, food and drink 3- listening: warm clothes drink a tent things to bring a kite food. f. Answers B6 – page 145 - Vui: a tent, some food – Lan: a ball - Ly: a camera – Mai&Nga: some drink 4.-Further practice: 1 6 11. 3. Production: (7’). - Look at the board. - Work in teams. - Take turn to choose the numbers. - Listen to the teacher carefully. - Answer the questions.. * Lucky numbers - Write the numbers on the board. - Divide class into teams. The teams take turn to choose the numbers. - Tell students that they have to answer the questions . * Homework: (3’) - Ask students to learn by. - Take notes and. 2 7 12. 3 8. 4 9. 5 10. ame two people who / bring cameras 2Name two people who / bring food. 4 Where is the boy’s picnic going to be? 6 Where are the girls going to go ca…? 7Name three people who / some drinks. 8What’s Lan going to bring? 10Who’s going to bring a tent? 11How many days are the girls /camp? 3 – 5 – 9 – 12 : Lucky numbers. - Activities..

(155) heart activities and “Be memorize - Be going to (near future). going to” to talk about the - Do home as the teacher - Exercises in the workbook on near future. requests. page - Have them prepare Unit 112, 113,114. 14 - Section: : ( C1) : - Unit 14: Making Plans – FREE Further listening and TIME PLANS - Section: : ( C1) reading pracftice with “Going to”. * Self – evaluation: …………………………………………………………………………………………………… …………………………………………………………………………………………………… …………………………………………………………………………………………………… Week: 30 Period: 86 Date of planning: 13/03/2014 Date of teaching:. UNIT 14: MAKING PLANS Section: SUGGESTIONS ( C1 ). A. Objectives: 1. Knowledge: By the end of the lesson ,ss will be able to Make suggestions with “Let’s …” and responding. Further practice in “want to (do)…” + Grammar: how long , what about , why don’t ………….? + Vocabulary: : relating to C 2.Skill: speaking , writing skills B. Teaching aids : 1. Teacher: textbook, cassette, tape……. 2. Student: book, notebook C. Steps of teaching: Teacher’s activities * Warm up: (5’) -Brainstorm - Ask students to tell the names of the intresting places in Viet Nam which they’d like to visit during summer vocation. - Get them to go to the board and write down their ideas. - Give feedback. 1. Presentation: (10’) Elicit vocabulary Translation Picture Translation Situation - Rub out and remember -Point to the Vietnamese translations and rub out English words. - Get students to call the English words.. Students’ activities. Content on the board. - Listen to the teacher. - Tell the names of the interesting places in Viet Nam.. Intersting places in VN. - Go to the board and write down their idea. - Listen to the teacher. - Repeat after the teacher. - Notice the main stress pattern. - Write the new words in their notebooks. - Students repeat chorally and remember all the English words. - Call the English words and write the English words if there is time.. Ha Long Da lat. 1-Vocabulary: - a pagoda: chïa - by bus: b»ng xe buýt - too # very: rÊt - too far:. g.. Checking vocabulary:.

(156) Pre Questions - Set the sence: Ba, Lan and their friends are going to go an interesting place in the vacation. Let answer the two questions below. Presentation dialogue - Show students the dialogue. - Ask them to play the roles of Ba and Lan. - Ask students to answer the questions. - Ask students to isolate the model sentence by Asking them some questions; + What is Ba going to do this summer vacation? + I am going to visit Hue. + Where is he going to stay? + He is going to stay with his aunt nad uncle.. 2. Practice: (20’) - Picture drill - Run through the pictures. - Hold up the first picture and say the model sentences: +Let’s go swimming. + Yes, let’s. - Do the same for the seccond picture. - Correct their mistakes. 3. Production: (7’) - Mapped dialogue - Put the dialogue on the board which is only words. The words are cues. - Model the dialogue. - Run through the cues like a drill with the whole class.. Where are they going to go? How are they going to travel? - Students read the dialogue in C1 on page 147 in pairs. - Make the questions to isolate the model sentence: -How much beef do you want? -How many eggs do you want?. - Look at the pictures. - Listen to the teacher. - Repeat it chorally and then individually. - Make the sentence for themselves. - Practice in pairs. - Some pairs practice in front.. 2-Reading comprehension h. C1 on page 147 a) going to Hue. e) By bike. go to huong pagoda. c) Walk there f) It’s too hot. d) It’s too far. g) By minibus. Form: - Let’s + Vinf - Why don’t we + Ving……? - What about + Ving…….? - Yes, let’s / That’s a good idea -Yes. Good idea / No, Let’s not. - Chúng ta hãy / Taïi sao chúng ta không? / Coøn veà thì sao? - Nói lời đề nghị làm việc gì. 3. Practice: - C3 on page 148-149: a) go swimming b) go to the musium c) play volleyball d) go to the zoo e) play badminton f) go camping 4.Further practice:. - Look at the board and listen to the teacher. - Repeat after the teacher. - Practice the dialogue in pair . - Some pairs practice in front. - Rewrite the dialogue .. You  -see a movie. - no… too hot. museum no / go by. Your friend  X / beach Yes / walk. Yes..

(157) mini - bus * Homework: (3’) - Ask students to learn vocabulary and how to talk about vacation plans. - Have them prepare: Grammar practice. - Take notes and memorize - Do as the teacher suggests.. - Vocabulary. +Wh + be + S + going to + V…………? S + be + going to + V. * Self – evaluation: ………………………………………………………………………………………………………………… ………………………………………………………………………………………………………………… ………………………………………………………………………………………………………………… Week: 30 Period: 87 Date pf planning: 13/03/2014 Date of teaching:. Unit 14 Making Plans Section: C- SUGGESTION ( C2,3,R). A. Objectives: 1. Knowledge: - By the end of the lesson ,ss will be able to Make suggestions with “Let’s …” and responding. Further practice in “want to (do)…” - Language contents: + Grammar: how long , what about , why don’t ………….? + Vocabulary: : relating to C 2. Language Skill: speaking , writing skills 3. Behavior: B. Teaching aids : 1. Teacher: - Text book , pictures . 2. Student: book, notebook C. Steps of teaching: Teacher’ activities *Ask ss some questions - calls some Ss to go to the board to the teacher check up * Activity 1 -ask ss to look the picture -give ss some words -let ss listen to the tape -call ss to practice -Corrects if necessary. * Activity 2 -ask ss to read the questions -ask ss answer the question -call some ss to give the keys. Students’ activities -Greeting -Monitor reports the number of students - go to the board to the teacher check up -look at it -copy them -listen to the tape -practice .-read them. Contents 1/ Classroom procedures: (6’) -Greeting -Checking attendance. 2/ Review of the previous Lesson 3/ New lesson : (32’) Listen and repeat New words Pagoda minibus 2. answer then write…... -answer the question He is going to go hue ……. -give the keys Listen.

(158) -Corrects if necessary. * Activity 3 -explain ss -ask ss work in paires -call ss to practice before the class * Activity 4 -explain ss -ask ss to copy this part - show them a picture and ask ss practice - corrects and give marks -Gives some works.. - notice. remember. -listen -work in paires On page (149) -practice before the class -Listen -copy 4/ Consolidation:(6’) -look at and practice What are you going to do….? I’m going to go huong pagoda - notice -Do at home.. 5/ Homework:(1’) - Rewrite the lesson in your books - Learn by heart vocabulary. * Self – evaluation: ………………………………………………………………………………………………………………… ………………………………………………………………………………………………………………… ………………………………………………………………………………………………………………… Week: 31 GRAMMAR Period: 88 Date of preparing: 13/03/2014 Date of teaching:. PRACTICE. A. Objectives: 1. Knowledge: After this period, students will be able to understand the text , use the Present simple tense B. Preparations: - Grammar: must, mustn’t - Vocabulary: words relating to lessons. * Teaching Aids: Text book, pictures, cassette... Prepare before the class. C. New lesson: 1/ Class oder ( 1’) -Greeting -Checking attendance. 2/ Review ( 6’) -Asks students to write the activity 2 on the board. 3/ New lesson (32’) Teacher’s activities - Survey - Have them tell about themselves and talk to their friends about their favorite sports.. Students’ activities - Try to tell about their activities and ask their friends about theirs.. Content on the board. Name. V like…… like Sports. X …… don’t. SeaFood Drink son.

(159) - Let them practice with their partners: + What sports do you like? + Football. + What sports don’t you like? + Swimming. - Feedback. - Write it up - Ask Students to write about the friends they have interviewed using 3rd person singular. - Correct their mistakes.. - Practice with partners. - Tell the teacher what they have asked their partner, e.g: Ha likes football but he doesn’t like swimming………?. 1. Ha. Football x swimming x. 2. 3.. - “ Ha likes football but he doesn’t like swimming ………………”. - Students write about the friends they have interviewed using 3rd person singular. - Write individually. - Slap the board i. Group works. 2.. Adverbs of frequency: - Put the Vietnamese - Say the translation on the board. Vietnamese - Call two students of two translation . 1 lÇn 1 tuÇn teams to the front of the - Run forward and class. slap the correct the the TV? - Call out one of English words on the board. movies? store? words in loud voice. - Continue until your - Nought and crosses students have swimming? fishing? mom? - Put the grid on the board. slapped all the table Badmin- Divide class into teams. words. camping? tennis? ton? One is noughts (O) and the other is Crosses (X). - Look at the board. - Two teams choose any - Work in groups. words in the boxes and ask - One is noughts (O) questions about feelings . and the other is - The team which has Crosses (X). three noughts or three - Choose any words crosses on a line will win in the boxes, ask the game. and ask questions about feelings : +How often do you go to the movies? +Twice a year. - Word cue drill 3. Present Progressive: - Run through the cues. - Look at the cues. - get up at 6 / get up at 7 - Hold up the first cues - Listen to the - go to school / go camping and say the model teacher. sentences. - Repeat it chorally - study / not study - Today, Hung’s on and then vacation. individually. - have rice for lunch / have a picnic + Hung usually gets up at - Make the sentence 6. for themselves. - walk home / walk in the mountain.

(160) + That’s right, but today he’s getting up at 7 - Do the same for the second cue. - Correct their mistakes. - Picture drill - Run through the pictures. - Hold up the first picture and say the model sentences: +What are they going to do? + They’re going to play soccer - Do the same for the seccond picture. - Correct their mistakes.. - Practice in pairs. - Some pairs practice in front. - Look at the pictures. - Listen to the teacher. - Repeat it chorally and then individually. - Make the sentence for themselves. - Practice in pairs. - Some pairs practice in front.. 4. Future (Going to): a) play soccer b) play tennis c) go camping d) go swimming e) watch TV f) cook. 5. What ‘s the weather like?. - Look at the board. - Lucky numbers - Work in teams. - Write the numbers on the - Take turn to board. choose the numbers. - Divide class into teams. - Listen to the The teams take turn to teacher carefully. choose the numbers. - Answer the - Tell students that they questions. have to answer the questions .. 1 2 3 4 5 6 1 Lucky number. 2 -b What’s the weather like in the summer? 3 - d What’s the weather like in the winter? 4 Lucky number. 5 - c What’s the weather like in the fall? 6 -a What’s the weather like in the spring?. - Find someone who - Put the table on the board. - Get students to get into groups. - Get students to ask each other questions. + Teacher: What are you going to do this evening? + Student (Mai): I’m going to watch TV……………………….. - Correct if there are any mistakes. - Feedback.. 5 .Future plans:. - Look at the board. - Work in groups. - Stand up and ask each orther questions. When they find someone who says “Yes” they fill in the name. They can’t fill in someone’s name more than once. - Tell the teacher what they have found, e.g. “ Mai is going to watch TV. Tomorrow, She’s going to do her homework. She’s going…. What are you going to do……..? Name This tomor- Weekeve row end Mai watch do have a TV home- pic.. work. Vacation visit Hue.

(161) * Homework: - Ask students to review vocabulary and Grammar points (Unit12 – Unit14) and exercises in the exercise book from Unit 12 to Unit 14 . - Have them prepare FORTY-FIVE MINUTE TEST .. - Review vocabulary and Grammar points (Unit12 – Unit14) and exercises in the exercise book from Unit 12 to Unit 14 . - Prepare FORTYFIVE MINUTE TEST.. - Vocabulary and Grammar points (Unit12 – Unit14). - Exercises in the exercise book from Unit 12 to Unit 14. - FORTY-FIVE MINUTE TEST.. * Self – evaluation: ………………………………………………………………………………………………………………… ………………………………………………………………………………………………………………… ………………………………………………………………………………………………………………… Week: 31 FORTYPeriod: 89 Date of planning: 27/03/2014 Date of teaching:. FIVE MINUTE TEST. A. Objectives: - Check the knowledge which has been learnt to know how well Sts know about the grammar, vocab, structures, understanding, - Sts do the test carefully, exactly,and clearly. B . New lesson. - Hand out the photocopies. - Ask Sts to master the test. C. Contents: Đề a I-LISTEN AND ANSWERB THE QUESTIONS (2.0MS). 1. How old is Nam? ……………………………………………………………….. 2. Where does he live? ……………………………………………………………….. 3. What does he do in his free time? ………………………………………………………………... 4. What is he going to do next Sunday ? ……………………………………………………………… II. CHOOSE THE BEST CORRECT ANSWERS (2.0MS) 1. She is going to ………………the citadel. a. visits b. visit c. to visit 2 …………he play basketball? No, he doesn’t. a. Do b. Is c. Does 3. Does Nga ………to the zoo every Sunday?-Yes, she does. a. goes b. go c.going d. to go 4. What are they doing?-They are …………….to music. a. listen b. listening c. listens d.to listen 5. …………………. is Hoa doing? She is reading. a. where b. what c.how d. when. d. visiting d. Are.

(162) 6. Mai is ……………… …………….up now. a. gets b. getting c. get 7. ………………..are you going to stay?- In a hotel. a. Where b. What c. How d. Who 8 …………………..much meat does Lan want? A kilo. a . who b. how c. what d. Which III. CHOOSE THE CORRECT WORD TO FILL IN THE BLANK (2.0MS. d. geting. She learning day my My name is Quang. I’m eleven years old. I’m in grade six. I’m in class 6 A. I am …………………….English now in my room . Every …………………… I learn speaking, listening, reading and writing. ………………English teacher is very kind to us. ………………… always helps us much in our studies IV-READ THE PASSAGE CAREFULLY Read the passage and do the exercises: Thu and her friends are going to have a picnic in Sapa. The weather is fine and cold. Thu is going to bring a camera to take some photos.Lan is going to bring some food. Nam is going to bring some drinds. Minh is going to bring a blanket. 1. Write True (T) or False (F)(1M): _____ a. The weather is fine and cold. _____ b. Thu is going to bring some food. 2. Answer the questions below(2M): a. Where are they going to have a picnic ? _____________________________________________ b. Is the weather fine and cold? ______________________________________________ V -ANSWER THESE QUESTIONS (1M) 1. What do you do in your free time? ………………………………………………………………………………….. 2. what are you going to do tonight? ….......................................................................................................................... Đề b I-LISTEN AND ANSWERB THE QUESTIONS (2.0MS). 1. Which class is Nam in? ……………………………………………………………….. 2. Where does he live? ………………………………………………………………. 3. What is he doing now? ………………………………………………………………. 4. What is he going to do next Sunday? …………………………………………………………….. II. CHOOSE THE BEST CORRECT ANSWERS (2.0MS) 1. She is going to ………………Hanoi a. visits b. visit c. to visit d. visiting 2 …………he play basketball? Yes, he does. a. Do b. Is c. Does d. Are 3. Does Nam ………to the zoo every Sunday?-Yes, he does. a. goes b. go c.going d. to go 4. What is he doing?-He is …………….to music. a. listen b. listening c. listens d.to listen 5. …………………. is Mai doing? - She is reading. a. where b. what c.how d. when 6. Tuan is …………………………….up now..

(163) a. gets b. getting c. get d. geting 7. ………………..is he going to stay?- In a hotel. a. Where b. What c. How d. Who 8 …………………..many eggs does Lan want? A dozen. a . who b. how c. what d. Which III. CHOOSE THE CORRECT WORD TO FILL IN THE BLANK (2.0MS She learning day my My name is Quang. I’m eleven years old. I’m in grade six. I’m in class 6 A. I am …………………….English now in my room . Every …………………… I learn speaking, listening, reading and writing. ……………English teacher is very kind to us. ……………………… always helps us much in our studies IV-READ THE PASSAGE CAREFULLY Read the passage and do the exercises: Thu and her friends are going to have a picnic in Sapa. The weather is fine and cold. Thu is going to bring a camera to take some photos. Lan is going to bring some food. Nam is going to bring some drinds. Minh is going to bring a blanket. 1. Write True (T) or False (F)(1M): _____ a. Thu and her friends are going to go camping in Sapa. _____ b. The weather is fine and cold. 2. Answer the questions below(2MS): a. Where are they going to have a picnic ? _____________________________________________ b. Is the weather fine and cold? ______________________________________________ V -ANSWER THESE QUESTIONS (1M) 1-What do you do in your free time? 2-what are you going to do tonight? * Self – evaluation: …………………………………………………………………………………………………………… …………………………………………………………………………………………………………… …………………………………………………………………………………………………………… ………………. Week: 31 UNIT 15: COUNTRIES Period: 90 Section: WE ARE THE WORLD (A1,2,3) Date of preparing: 27/03/2014 Date of teaching: A. Objectives: 1. Knowledge: By the end of the lesson , The student learn how to use countries ,Nationalities and Languages vocabulary to talk about where people are from. + Grammar: what are you going …...................? + Vocabulary: : relating to A1-3 2.Skill: speaking , writing skills 3.Behavior: B. Teaching aids : 1. Teacher: - Text book , pictures . 2. Student: textbook, …….. C. Steps of teaching: Teacher’s activities. Students’ activities. Content on the board.

(164) * Warm up: (5’) - Brainstorm - Ask students to think of some country names . - Get them to go to the board and write down their ideas. - Give feedback. 1. Presentation: (10’) Elicit vocabulary  Translation  Explanation  Situation  Translation  Use the pictures to work out the country names in Vietnamese. - Slap the board - Put the Vietnamese translation on the board. - Call two students of two teams to the front of the class. - Call out one of English words in loud voice. Presenation Text - Let students to listen to the cassette and repeat. - Introduce oneself and others: + I’m (teacher’s name). I’m from Viet Nam . And this is John. He ‘s from the USA. - Ask some students some questions and to introduce the Wh-question “Where is …… from?” and the answer “He / She’s from …………”. - Point to the questions and answer to get students to isolate the model sentences . 2. Practice: (20’) Nought and crosses - Put the grid on the board. - Divide class into teams. One is noughts (O) and the other is Crosses (X). - Two teams choose any words in the boxes and ask. Japan Viet Nam - Listen to the teacher. Canada - Students to think of Counties some coutry names. - Go to the board and USA China write down their idea. 1- Vocabulary: - Listen to the teacher. - the world: thế giới - Repeat after the teacher. - a country: quoác gia. - Notice the main stress - a nationality: quoác tòch pattern. - to speak: noùi tieáng. - Write the new words in -Canada/France/China/theUSA/Jap their notebooks. an /Great Britain/Australia/Viet Nam - Group works. - Say the Vietnamese translation . - Run forward and slap the correct words on the board. - Continue until students have slapped all the words.. quoác tòch Thế giới Phaùp Nhaät quoác gia UÙc. 2-Model sentences - Listen to the cassette - Where are you from? and repeat. - I’m from Viet Nam. - Pay attention to the - Where is she from? teacher. - She e is from France j. Form - Introduce themselves and others . - Where is / are + S + from? - Answer the teacher’s - S + am / is / are + from + teân questions nước - Give the form, meaning k. and use. l. * Use - …………từ đâu đến? - Hoûi queâ quaùn .. - Look at the board. 3.Practice: - Work in groups. - One is noughts (O) and Laur the other is Crosses (X). a - Choose any words in John the boxes, ask and ask Susa questions about country n names :. Mari e YOU Bruc e. Lee Yoko Min h.

(165) questions about county + Laura . names +Where’s Laura from? - The team which has three +She’s from Canada . noughts or three crosses on a line will win the game. - Listen to the teacher - Read the sentences and ask attentively. them to listen attentively. + My name’s Minh. I’m - Ask them to retell Minh’s from Viet Nam. I speak introduce. Vietnamese. - Write the them on the + Minh is from Viet Nam. board and get students to He speaks Vietnamese. isolate the model sentences - Write in the form in the - Substitution drill notesbooks. - Let them listen to the - Listen to the cassette. cassette and repeat. + Minh is from Viet + Minh is from Viet Nam. Nam. He speaks He speaks Vietnamese. Vietnamese. + Yoko + Yoko is from Japan. She speaks Japanese. 3. Production: (7’) - Mapped dialogue - Look at the board and - Put the dialogue on the listen to the teacher. board which is only words. - Repeat after the teacher. The words are cues. - Practice the dialogue in - Model the dialogue. pair . - Run through the cues like a - Some pairs practice in drill with the whole class. front. - Rewrite the dialogue .. - A2 – A3,page 155: - My name’s Minh. - I’m from Viet Nam. - I speak Vietnamese. - Minh is from Viet Nam. - He speaks Vietnamese. - I speak + language(tieáng). -He/She+speaks+language (tieáng) - A3,page 155: - Minh - Laura - Yoko - Lee - Bruce - Susan 4.Further practice:. Thu  -Who / that? -Where / from? -What/nationality Which/lang…?. Chi  Susan Great Britain British. English. * Homework: (3’) - Ask students to learn Take notes and - Countries, nationalities and vocabulary and how to memorize languages vocabulary. introduce their nationality - Do as the teacher -Where +is / are+S+from? and language and ask others suggests. - S + am / is / are + country name. about these. - I + speak +language (tieáng) - Have them prepare Unit 15 - He / She + speaks + language – L2A5: Writing a (tieáng) postcard about being on - Unit 15: Country – WE ARE vacation. THE WORLD - Lesson 2: A5 * Self – evaluation: …………………………………………………………………………………………………… …………………………………………………………………………………………………… …………………………………………………………………………………………………… Week: 32 UNIT 15: COUNTRIES Period: 91 Section: WE ARE THE WORLD (A4,5,6,R) Date of planning: 27/03/2014 Date of teaching: A. Objectives:.

(166) 1. Knowledge: By the end of the lesson ,ss will be able to use countries ,Nationalities and Languages vocabulary to talk about where people are from. + Grammar: + Vocabulary: : 2.Skill: speaking , writing skills 3. Behavior: Students can write postcards to their friends. B. Teaching aids : 1. Teacher:- Text book , pictures . 2. Student: book, notebook C. Steps of teaching: Teacher’s activities * Warm up: (5’) - Picture - Show them pictures of some famous people ans ask them about their countries and nationalties. + Where is he from? + What’s his nationality? 1. Presentation: (10’) * Elicit vocabulary  Realia  Situation  Synonym  Situation  Translation - Rub out and remember -Point to the Vietnamese translations and rub out English words. - Get students to call the English words. - Show students the postcard. - Read the postcard aloud. - Mention the situation when the writer write the postcard. - Ask questions to elicit the content of the postcard. - Grid - Explain how to work on the exercise: These are cities and intersting places of some countries: Japan, Vietnam, The USA … . Now work in teams to put them in two columns. Students’ activities. Content on the board - Uncle Ho. - Look at the pictures. - Listen to the teacher’s questions and answer about their countries and nationalities. + He’s from Viet Nam. + He’s Vietnamese.. - Lenin. 1-Vocabulary: - a postcard: böu thieáp - Listen to teacher . - wet: ẩm ướt - Repeat after the teacher. - a lot of = many: nhieàu - Notice the Vietnamese - interesting places: những nơi translation. thuù vò - Copy in their notebook. - to be on vacation: nghæ - Students repeat chorally and remember all the English words. - Call the English words and write the English words if there is time. - Look at the postcard m. - A5 – page 156: shown by the teacher. 1. Who’s the postcard from? - Read the postcard. 2. Where is he? - Listen to the teacher’s 3. What’s the weather like? emphasis. 4. Is he traveling by train? - Try to answer the 5. What’s he going to do questions about the content tomorrow? of the poatcard. 6. Who’s he the postcard? 7. Where’s he? - Listen to the teacher. - Repeat the words aftre the teacher. - Work in teams to put the words in two columns.. Country. City. Japan. Tokyo. Vietnam. Hue. The. New. In .place M Fujiama Th.Citade l The.

(167) + Where are you ? - Use the Grid as cues to +I’m in Japan.I’m visiting ask questions and answer. Tokyo. +What are you goin to do tomorrow? + I’m going to visit M.Fuj.. 2. Practice: (20’) -Transformation Writing -Divide students into 6 groups -Help students write their postcards in groups. Explain how a postcard is written. ………… Dear ………, I’m on vacation in London. The weather is …………… . 3. Production: (7’) - Correction - Ask some students to read their postcards aloud. - Correct if there are any mistakes. - Encourage the good students to put more details in their postcards if possible.. - Work in groups - Write their postcards in groups. - Listen attentively.. - Sme students read their postcards aloud. - Correct the mistakes if there is any. - Try to write as many sentences as possible.. Statue of Liberty Beijin The Great China g Wall Australi Bondi Sydney a Beach The Eiffel France Paris Town 2-While Writing: n. A5 - page 156 - Group 1: Postcard from Japan - Group 2: Postcard from VietNam - Group 3: Postcard from The USA - Group 4: Postcard from China - Group 5: Postcard from Australia - Group 6: Postcard from France 3.Post writing: o. Suggested postcard Dear Minh, I’m on vcation in Beijing . The weather is cold. I’m traveling by car and writing a lot of interesting places. Tomorrow, I’m giong to visit The Great Wall of Beijing Love, Nga USA. York. * Homework: - Ask students to learn by - Take notes and memorize - Vocabulary. heart vocabulary and how to - Do homework as the - A postcard.. write a postcard. teacher requests. - Exercises on page 124, - Have them do exercises on 125,126 in the workbook. page 124, 125,126 in the - Unit 15: Countries – CITIES, workbook and prepare Unit BUILDING AND PEOPLE 15 - Lesson 1: (B1) : Lesson 3 : (B1) Comparative and Superlative.. * Self – evaluation: Week: 32 UNIT 15: COUNTRIES Period: 92 Section: CITIES, BUILDINGS AND PEOPLE (B1,2) Date of preparing: 27/03/2014 Date of teaching: A. Objectives: 1. Knowledge: By the end of the lesson , ss will be able to compare Places using comparative and superlative adjectives of one syllable. + Grammar: (+er) : small à smaller à the smallest (small, tall, cold) (Double last letter + er) big à bigger à the biggest + Vocabulary: : relating to B1-2 2. Language Skill: speaking , writing skills.

(168) B. Teaching aids : 1. Teacher: - Text book , pictures . 2. Student: book, notebook C. Steps of teaching: Teacher’s activities * Warm up: (5’) - Matching - Write the words on the board. - Get students to come up to the board to match . - Check 1.Presentation: (10’) - Show students the pictures in B1 on page 158, ask them to observe and tell about each thing. - Write the words on the board and ask them to repeat. - Let students observe the three different adjectives. Ask them to say what the difference is and give the formation of the comparative and superlative form. - Let students copy the models and the formations, and memorize.. 2. Practice: (20’) * Word cue drill - Run through the cues. - Hold up the first cues and say the model sentences. S1: Hanoi is bigger than Danang S2: But HCMC is the biggest. - Do the same for the second cue. - Correct their mistakes. 3. Production: (7’) - Answer given - Put the short answers on the board. - Get students to ask questions and answer.. Students’ activities - Look at the board. - Work in teams - Come up to the board then match . - Check.. - Look at the pictures and tell the teacher about the different of things presented. - Look at the board and repeat the new words as the teacher requested. - Observe and notice the difference of the phrases given. - Take notes and learn by heart.. Content on the board 1. Revision: hot Hue HCMC small wet Hoi An Sapa big Hanoi Long Xuyen cold 2 .Presentation: A1 on page 158 + a big building + a bigger building. + the biggest building + a small house + a smaller house + the smallest house * Form:. Superlative form of short adjec adjectives tives Short ADJ + The + Short ER ADJ + EST - In the superlative form, the definite article THE is written before the adjective. 3. Practice: - Da Nang / Hanoi / HCMC / big Comparative form of short. - Look at the cues. - Listen to the teacher. - Vinh / Long Xuyen / Hoi An - Repeat it chorally and then / small individually. - Make the sentence for - Hanoi / Can Tho / Hue / wet themselves. - Practice in pairs. - Ben Tre / Tra Vinh / Ha - Some pairs practice in Tinh / hot front. - Hanoi / Uong Bi / Sapa / cold 3. Further practice: - Read the sentences. - Listen to the teacher. - Phanxipang. - Repeat it chorally and then Tinh individually. - Make the questions . - The Mekong.. - Ha.

(169) + S1: What’s the tallest mountain in Vietnam? + S2: Phanxipan. - Do the same for the second cue. - Correct their mistakes. * Homework: - Ask students to learn vocabulary and comparative / superlative adjectives. - Have them prepare Unit 15. - Practice in pairs. - Some pairs practice in front.. - Hue. - Sapa. - HCMC. - Take notes and memorize - Vocabulary. + Short ADJ + ER - Do as the teacher + The + Short ADJ + EST suggests. - Unit 15: Counties – CITIES, BUILDING AND PEOPLE -. * Self – evaluation: …………………………………………………………………………………………………… …………………………………………………………………………………………………… ……………………………………………………………………………………………………. Week:32 Period: 93 Date of planning:27/03/2014 Date of teaching:. THE CORRECTION OF THE TEST. I/ Objectives: After this period, student will be able to : + correct the test. + write the test into their notebooks. II. Content: Answer Keys: I/ Mỗi câu đúng 0,5 đ 1) e 2) d 3) c 4) b 5) a II/ Mỗi câu đúng 0,5 đ 1. c 2. b 3. a 4. d 5. c 6. a 7. a 8. c 9. b 10. a III/ Mỗi câu đúng 0,5 đ 1. How are you? 2. And you? 3. Fine 4. are you going 5. I’m going to.

(170) IV/ Mỗi câu đúng 0,5 điểm 1. (Student’s answers) * Self – evaluation: …………………………………………………………………………………………………………… …………………………………………………………………………………………………………… ……………………………………………………………………………………………………………. Duyệt của BGH. Duyệt của tổ trưởng. Week:33 UNIT 15: COUNTRIES Period: 94 Section: CITIES, BUILDINGS AND PEOPLE ( B3,4,R ) Date of planning: 10/04/2014 Date of teaching: I. Objective: 1. Knowledge: By the end of the lesson ,ss will be able to talk about your favorite weather *Grammar: what weather do you like…………..? *Vocabulary: : relating to A4-R 2. Language Skill: speaking , writing skills 3. Behavior: II. Teaching aids : 1. Teacher: Te-xt book , pictures . 2. Student: book, notebook.

(171) III. Steps of teaching: Teacher’s activities * Warm up: (5’) - Brainstorm - Set up the sence: What do Minh and his friends do on the weekend? - Ask students to think of town and the country. - Get them to go to the board and write down their ideas. - Give feedback.. Students’ activities. Content on the board Pastimes. - Students to think of the listen to music town and country. go for a walk - Go to the board and write fly a kite down their idea. watch TV play badmint go swimming play video games. 1. Presentation: (10’) - Set the scene: You are going to read a short passage about Ba. Guess what Ba does in different weather. (hot, cold, cool and warm). 2.Prediction - Listen to the teacher. a. hot ? - Guess what Ba does in b. cold ? different weather. c. cool - Students give their d. warm ? predictions. 3. Model sentences - Let students read the text - Read the text. What+do/does+S+ do+ themselves. when it’s….? - Ask some students some questions -Answer the teacher’s When it’s…, S + and let them answer loudly. questoins. V……….. - Point to the questions and get - Give the form, meaning and - …………laøm gì khi students to isolate the model use. thời tiết……………? sentences . - Hoûi ai laøm gì vaøo thơìø tiết nào đó . 2. Practice: (20’) * Word cue drill - Run through the cues. - Hold up the first cues and say the model sentences. - What do you do when it’s cold? - I go jogging when it’s cold. - Do the same for the second cue. - Correct their mistakes. 3. Production: (7’) - Get students to change the text about Ba and write about themselves. - Get students to swrap books, read their partners’ texts, then write about What their partners do in different weather.. 4. Practice: - Look at the cues. - cold / go jogging - Listen to the teacher. - cool / do aerobics - Repeat it chorally and then individually. - hot / go - Make the sentence for swimming themselves. - Practice in pairs. - warm / go to the - Some pairs practice in front. park - Students change the text about Ba and write about themselves. - Swrap books, read their partners’ texts, then write about What their partners do in different weather.. 5. Further practice: 4. A4, page 136 a. When it’s hot, I ………… When it’s hot, I …………… When it’s hot, I …………… When it’s hot, I …………… b. When it’s hot, he / she … When it’s hot, he / she ….

(172) When it’s hot, he / she … When it’s hot, he / she … * Homework: (3’) - Ask students to learn seasons - Take notes and memorize vocabulary and how to talk about - Do as the teacher suggests. their favorite activities in different weather. - Have them prepare. - Seasons vocabulary. -What +do /does+S+do+ when it’s…? - When it’s ………………, S + V…………….. * Self – evaluation: ………………………………………………………………………………………………………………… ………………………………………………………………………………………………………………… …………………………………………………………………………………………………………………. Week: 33 UNIT 15: COUNTRIES Period: 95 Section: NATURAL FEATURES (C1,2) Date of planning: 10/04/2014 Date of teaching: I. Objectives: 1. Knowledge: By the end of the lesson ,ss will be able to use comparatives……. + Grammar: comparatives suprelatives………….? + Vocabulary: : relating to C 2.Skill: speaking , writing skills II. Teaching aids : 1. Teacher:- Text book , pictures . 2. Student: book, notebook III. Steps of teaching: Teacher’s activities * Warm up: (5’) - Slap the board - Put English words on the board. - Call two students of two teams to the front of the class. - Call out one of the Vietnamese translation in loud voice.. Students’ activities. Content on the board 1. Revision: - Group works. moutains - Say Enghlish words beautiful . fields - Run forward and slap beaches the correct words on rivers the board. lakes Continue until students have slapped all the words.. 1. Presentation: (10’) Elicit vocabulary  Translation  Translation  Synonym  Explanation. 2 .Pre writing: - Listen to teacher . * Vocabulary: - Repeat after the - a forest: rừng teacher. - a desert: sa maïc Notice the - a lot of = lots = many: nhieàu Vietnamese - great (adj): to lớn translation..

(173) - Copy notebook. Rub out and remember -Point to the Vietnamese translations and rub out English words. - Get students to call the English words. Presentation text - Show students the text and let them to the cassette and repeat. - Ask some students to read aloud and ask them: + What are there 6 “natural peatuers Lan tells us about? - Show them a picture of a desert and ask them if they know why there isn’t a desert in Viet Nam. - Ask them to give the formation of “ a lot of..”. - Let students copy the models and the formations, and memorize.. in. their. Students repeat chorally and remember all the English words. - Call the English words and write the English words if there is time.. .Presentation: - Listen to the cassette and repeat.. - Some students read the text aloud and answer: + mountains, rivers, lakes, rain, forests, beaches. - Look at the picture of a desert and answer the question : “Because we have lotsof rain / the country very green, we have big forest, a lot of lakes and rivers”. - Take notes and learn by heart. 2. Practice: (20’) - Look at the pictures. - Picture drill - Listen to the teacher. - Run through the pictures. - Repeat it chorally - Hold up the first picture and and then individually. say the model sentences: - Make the sentence +What are they going to do? for themselves. + They’re going to play - Practice in pairs. soccer - Some pairs practice - Do the same for the in front. seccond picture. - Correct their mistakes. 3. Production: (7’) - Write it up - Write the words on the board. - Get students to come up to the board to match the cities with natural features . - Check - Get students use the cues to write a passage about natural features in Viet Nam.. * Checking vocabulary:. C1 on page 162 – 163 we have lots of rain / the country very green, we have big forest, a lot of lakes and rivers” LOTS OF / A LOT OF + C . NOUN / UNC.NOUN. - Sau Lots of / a lot of là danh từ không đếm được hoặc danh từ điếm được số nhiều.. 3. Practice: a) mountains b) rivers c) lakes d) rain e) forests f) beaches g) deserts. 3. Further practice: - Look at the board. - Lai Chau forests - Work in teams - Can Tho beaches - Come up to the board - Hai Noi mountains then match . - Pleiku rice fields - Check. - Da Nang river - Hue lake - Write a passage - Quang Ninh rain about natural features My country is very beautiful and in in Viet Nam. teresting. In Lai Chau there are lots of ..............................................................

(174) . * Homework: - Ask students to learn by - Take notes and - Vocabulary. heart vocabulary and “lots memorize - Lots of / a lot of.. of” - Do as the teacher - Unit 15: Countries – NATURAL - Have them prepare Unit 15 requests. FEATURE - Lesson 6 : (C 3) - Lesson 6: (C 3) : Reading a text about the world’s great rivers and mountains……………… * Self – evaluation: …………………………………………………………………………………………………… …………………………………………………………………………………………………… …………………………………………………………………………………………………… Week: 33 UNIT 15: COUNTRIES Period: 96 Section: NATURAL FEATURES (C3,R) Date of planning: 10/04/2014 Date of teaching: I. Objectices: 1.Knowledge: By the end of the lesson, Ss will able to reading about the world’s great rivers and mountains to skim for details and get further practice in using comparatives superlatives. + Grammar: comparatives suprelatives………….? + Vocabulary: : relating to C 2.Skill: speaking , reading, writing skills II. Teaching aids : 1. Teacher:- Text book , pictures . 2. Student: book, notebook III. Steps of teaching: Teacher’s activities * Warm up: (5’) - Word Square - Write the word of the square on the board. - Tell the students what the topic is and how many hidden words are there. - Get the students to come to the board and circle any words they can see.. 1. Presentation: (10’) Elicit vocabulary  Mine  Visual  Translation  Translation. Students’ activities - Look at the word of the square on the board. - Listen to the teacher and answer the teacher questions. + There are 19 hidden workds - Come to the board and circle any words they can see. - Listen to teacher . - Repeat after the teacher. - Notice the Vietnamese translation. - Copy in their notebook.. Content on the board 1. Revision: R I V E R S W M S T A R T S E L B E A C H T R E E I G I E I R O N E G R G L O T S H S D L R O W X great, long meters, rain, high, China river, star, beach, tree, lots world girl 2 .Pre - reading: Vocabulary: - to flow to : chaûy ra - the sea : bieån. - Tibet : Taây Taïng - North Africa : Baéc Phi. C H I N A O F.

(175) Rub out and remember -Point to the Vietnamese translations and rub out English words. - Get students to call the English words. True or False statements - Set the sence: You are going to read about some great rivers and mountains in the world. Now work in pairs and guess about the text . - Hang th poster of statements o the board and ask them guess which statements are true and which are false. 2. Practice: (20’) - Get students to read the text and check. - Ask students to read the text carefully and answer the questions. Lucky numbers - Write the numbers on the board. - Divide class into teams. The teams take turn to choose the numbers. - Tell students that they have to answer the questions .. 3. Production: (7’) - Let some pairs practice asking and answering about these rivers and mountains with Wh – questions. - Let them do some more practice on other rivers and mountains they know. * Homework: - Ask students to learn by heart vocabulary and comparatives and superlatives. - Have them do Exercises. - Students repeat chorally and remember all the English words. - Call the English words and write the English words if there is time.. * Checking vocabulary:. - Listen to the teacher. 1. There are two great river in Viet -Guess which is the Nam biggest city in the world? 2. The Red River is longer than the Put the cities in order: Mekong River. biggest first.. 3. The Red River and the Mekong River both star in China 4. The longest river in the world is not in Viet Nam 5. Phanxipang is the highest mountain in the world - Read the text and check. - Read the text carefully and answer the questions.. - Look at the board. - Work in teams. - Take turn to choose the numbers. - Listen to the teacher carefully. - Answer the questions.. 2.While reading: C3 – p 165 1. T 2. F 3. F 4. T 5. F * Comprehension questions: C3 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 2 Which is the longest river in VN? 3 Where does the Mekong River star? 4 Which is the highest mountain in the world? 6Which is the longest river in the world? 7Which sea does the Nile River flow to? 8 Which is the highest mountain in the world? 10 How thick is the Great Wall? 1 - 5 - 9 - 10 : Lucky numbers 4.Post reading:. - Some pairs practice asking and answering - Wh – Questions: What, where, before the class, using which, Wh – questions. how………… - Do some free practice with other rivers and mountains in Viet Nam or others countries Take notes and - Vocabulary. memorize - Comparatives and Superlatives - Do homework as the - Exercises from page 127 to 129 teacher requests. in the workbook. - Unit 16: Man And The.

(176) from page 127 to 129 in Environment – ANIMAL AND the workbook and prepare PLANTS - Lesson 1 : (A,2) Unit 16 - Lesson 1: (A,2) : Countable and uncountable quantifiers. * Self – evaluation: ………………………………………………………………………………………………………………… ………………………………………………………………………………………………………………… ………………………………………………………………………………………………………………… Week: 34 UNIT 16: MAN AND THE ENVIRONMENT Period: 97 Section: ANIMALS AND PLANS (A1,2) Date of planning: 10/04/2014 Date of teaching: I. Objectives: 1.Knowledge: By the end, Students can use a lot, a little, a few to talk about Food. + Grammar: a lot of, a little ...................? + Vocabulary: : relating A1-2 2. Skill: speaking , writing skills 3. Behavior: II. Teaching aids : 1. Teacher: - Text book , pictures . 2. Student: book, notebook III. Steps of teaching: Teacher’s activities * Warm up: (5’) * Jumbled words -Write numbers whose letters are in disorder. - Divide the class into two teams. - Ask students from each team to go to the board and write the correct words .. Students’ activities. Content on the board 1. Revision: - toespota = -Look at the board. potatoes - Listen to the teacher. - werflos = - Work in teams. flowers - Go to the board and write - gegs = eggs the correct words. (One word, - motatoes = one student). tomatoes - icer = rice - nonios = onions - tableveges = vegetables. 1. Presentation: (10’) - Use pictures and some real things as chalk, pens, books, water to identify the meaning and usage of the quantifiers some, a few, a little, a lot of. - Let students listen and repeat : some rice, a lot of rice, a little rice, some eggs, a lot of eggs, a few eggs - Ask them to give the formation of “ a lot. 2. Presentation: - Look at what the teacher - some eggs show and notice the meaning some rice as well as the usage of the quantifiers some, a few, a - a lot of eggs a little, a lot of. lot of rice - Listen and repeat - Take notes and learn by - a few eggs a heart. little rice * Some / a lot of / a little / a few: Some / a lot of / a few +.

(177) of…………..”. - Have them take note.. 2. Practice: (20’) - Picture drill - Run through the pictures. - Hold up the first picture and say the model sentences: +How many potatoes are there? + There are a lot. - Do the same for the seccond picture. - Correct their mistakes.. Plural Noun Some / a lot of / a little + Unc Noun - Some: 1 vaøi - A lot of: nhieàu - A few / a little: 1 ít 3. Practice: - Look at the pictures. - Listen to the teacher. - Repeat it chorally and then individually. - Make the sentence for themselves. - Practice in pairs. - Some pairs practice in front.. a) a lot of potatoes b) some tomatoes c) a lot of onions d) a few vegetables e) a little rice f) some flowers g) deserts. 3. Production: (7’) 4.Further practice: - Chain game - a little rice - Write the phrases on the - Look at the board - some tomatoes board. - Get into groups of four or - a few eggs - Ask students to get into five. There’s a little rice. groups of four or five. - Listen to the teacher. There’s a little rice and - Do the model. - Play games. some Tomatoes ……………………………… * Homework: - Ask students to learn by heart - Take notes and memorize - Vocabulary. vocabulary and Countable and - Do as the teacher requests. - Lots of / a lot of / a few / a uncountable quantifiers. little - Have them prepare Unit 16 - Unit 16: Man And The Lesson 2: (A,R) : Reading a Environment – ANIMAL text about farming and “a lot.” AND PLANTS - Lesson 2 : (A3,R) * Self – evaluation: ………………………………………………………………………………………………………………… ………………………………………………………………………………………………………………… ………………………………………………………………………………………………………………… Week: 34 UNIT 16: MAN Period: 98 Section: Date of planning: 10/04/2013 Date of teaching:. AND THE ENVIRONMENT ANIMALS AND PLANTS ( A3,R ). I. Objectives: 1.Knowledge: By the end, students can understand understand ideas in iterms of cause and effect: “Why …… ?” “Because …” . + Grammar: some, a lots of …..why ….? + Vocabulary: : relating to A 2. Skill: speaking , writing skills 3. Behavior:.

(178) II. Teaching aids : 1. Teacher: - Text book , pictures . 2. Student:book, notebook III. Steps of teaching: Teacher’s activities * Warm up: (5’) -Matching - Put the Vietnamese translation and English words on the board. -Ask students to match English words with the Vietnamese translation . - Ask students to work in teams.. 1. Presentation: (10’) - Elicit vocabulary  Translation  Mime  Translation  Translation  Explanation  Translation. What and where - Elicit the vocabulary from the students and write them in the circles. - Get students to repeat the words including the rubbed out words by pointing at the empty circle.. Students’ activities Group works. - Lookl at the board. - Listen to the teacher. - Work in teams. - Come to the board and match English words with the Vietnamese translation.. - Listen to teacher . - Repeat after the teacher. - Notice the Vietnamese translation. - Copy in their notebook.. Content on the board 1. Revision : the population rừng forests troàng the world caùnh đồng farmer daân soá to grow con vaät fields noâng daân food thức ăn animals thế giới 2 .Pre - reading: Vocabulary: - land : đất - to cut down (tree / the forest) : đốn - to burn : đốt - to destroy : phaù huûy - plants : caây coái - in danger: trong moái nguy hieåm * Checking vocabulary: cut down destroy. - Students repeat chorally and remember all the words. - Go to the board and fill in the circles with the right burn words.. land. plants dangerous Ordering pictures - Set the sence: You are going to - Listen to the teacher. read about some problems which - Put the problems in are happing now. Can you put the order. problems above in order.. 2. Practice: (20’). a) b) c) d) e). producing plants cutting down trees More food Burning the forests Growing the population f) Making new fields g) Animals and plants in danger. 2.While reading:.

(179) - Get students to read the text and check. - Have them answer the questions in full sentences then copy in their notebooks – the passage and answers . + Why do we need more land? ……………………………………. 3. Production: (7’) - Recall - Ask students to retell the content of the above passage, ask them some questions as models students to practice asking questions with “Why……?” and answer with “Because …………”. - Read the text and check. e) c) b) - Read the passage carefully d) - Answer the questions in full f) a) g) sentences, then copy the Comprehension passage and the answers. questions: A5,p 168 a) ..because there are more people b) ..because they need more fields c) .. because people /we are destroying their home and their. - Listen to the teacher, then practice in pairs asking Wh – question with “Why ………” and answer with “Because …………”. environment. 4.Post reading: - What’s the population of the world now? - Why do people need more food? - Why do people cut down the forests? - Why do farmers burning the forests? - Why are the Asian animals in danger?. * Homework: - Ask students to learn by heart - Take notes and memorize - Vocabulary. vocabulary and “why …” and - Do homework as the - “Why ………?” and answer “ Because …………”. teacher requests. “Because………?. - Have them prepare Unit 16 - Unit 16: Man And Lesson 4: (B1) : reading a text The Environment – about polution.. POLLUTION - Lesson 4 : (B1) * Self – evaluation: …………………………………………………………………………………………………… …………………………………………………………………………………………………… …………………………………………………………………………………………………… Week: 34 UNIT 16: MAN AND THE ENVIRONMENT Period:99 Section: POLLUTION ( B1 ) Date of preparing: 10/04/2014 Date of testing: I-Aim: 6. Reading a text about Pollution for vocabulary and to understand ideas . II. Objective: 7. At the end, students can understand ideas. III. Teaching aids: 8. Textbook and poster. IV. Procedure:.

(180) Teacher’s activities * Warm up: (5’) - Slap the board - Put English words on the board. - Call two students of two teams to the front of the class. - Call out one of the Vietnamese translation in loud voice. 1. Pre – reading: (10’) Elicit vocabulary  Translatio n  Visual  Translatio n  Translatio n  Explanati on  Example  Translati on Rub out and remember -Point to the Vietnamese translations and rub out English words. - Get students to call the English words.. Students’ activities Content on the board Group works. 1. Revision: - Say Enghlish words đốn hạ cây . moái nguy hieåm - Run forward and slap đốt cháy the correct words on saûn xuaát the board. con vaät Continue until phaù huûy students have slapped all the words.. - Listen to teacher . - Repeat after the teacher. Notice the Vietnamese translation. - Copy in their notebook.. Students repeat chorally and remember all the English words. - Call the English words and write the English words if there is time.. 2 .Pre - reading: Vocabulary: - the environment : môi trường - The ocean = the sea: biển, đại dương - the air : không khí - trash : rác rưởi - pollute : làm ổ nhiểm - power: năng lượng - waste: phí phaïm, laõng phí. * Checking vocabulary:. B1 – page 169 What are we destroying? 1. 2. 3. What are we wasting? 1. 2. What are we polluting? 1. 2. 3. 4.. Pre Questions Predict - Listen to the - Set the sence: You are teacher. going to read a text - Guess the about What we are answers. doing to our environment. Guess the answers for the questions. 2. Practice: (20’) 2.While reading: - Get students to read - Read the text and What are we destroying? the text and check. check. 1. forests 2. wild animal 3.plants What are we wasting? 1. water 2. power What are we polluting? 1. the air 2. the land 3.the rivers 4. the oceans - Have them answer the Comprehension questions: questions in full - Read the passage a) ..because we’re detroying the forest sentences then copy in carefully b) Gases are polluting the air..

(181) * Self – evaluation: …………………………………………………………………………………………………… …………………………………………………………………………………………………… ……………………………………………………………………………………………………. Week: 35 Unit 16: MAN AND THE ENVIRONMENT Period: 100 Section B: Pollution (B2, *3) Date of planning: 10/04/2014 Day of teaching: A. Objectives: 1. Knowledge: By the end of the lesson ,ss will be able to to talk with ‘ do, don’t’ + Grammar: do and don’t…...................? + Vocabulary: : relating to B2-3 2. Skills: speaking , writing skills B. Teaching aids : - Teacher: Text book , pictures . - Student: book, notebook C. Steps of teaching: Teacher’s work 1.Warm up: (5’) - Ask SS play games “slap the board” 2. Presentation: (10’) - Introduce the new lesson. - Explain the listen to the tape. - Ask them to read aloud (chorally or ind Individually). - Check and feedback.. 3. Practice: (20’) - Introduce the situation and use make. - Call SS write in front of the class. - Check.. Students’ work - Practice.. - Listen. - Read.. - Listen. - Practice in pairs works.. Content Pollution, destroy, wild, burn, ocean, gas, power. 2. Listen and read: New words: - throw (v): ném, vất - pick (v): hái - damage (v): làm hỏng - keep off (v) tránh khỏi - bag (n): bao, túi, bị - put (v): đổ, đặt vào - leave (v): rời khỏi, bỏ đi - grass (n): cỏ - save (v): tiết kiệm - collect (v): thu nhặt - bottle (n): chai, lọ Now match the rules with these signs: a. Don’t damage trees. b. Save water. c. Don’t throw trash on the street. d. Collect bottles and cans. e. Keep off the grass. f. Don’t pick flowers..

(182) - Practice pairs work. - Correct.. - Listen. - Practice.. g. Collect paper. h. Don’t throw trash in the country. 5. Using should and shouldn’t: a. We should not leave trash. b. We should save water. c. We shouldn’t damage trees. d. We should collect cans. e. We should save light/electric. f. We should collect bottles. g. We should not throw trash in the park/street/country.. 4. Consolidation: (7’) - T. asks SS to recall the questions. - Remember. * Homework: (3’) - Learning the lesson at home. - Prepare “Unit 16. Man and the Environment. Section B: Pollution (2)” for the next time. * Self – evaluation: …………………………………………………………………………………………………… …………………………………………………………………………………………………… …………………………………………………………………………………………………… Week: 35 Period 101 UNIT 16: MAN AND THE ENVIRONMENT Date of planning: 10/04/2014 Section: POLLUTION ( B4,5,R ) Date of teaching: A. Objectives: 1. Knowledge: By the end of the lesson ,ss will be able to know about the environment + Grammar: some, a lots of …..why ….? + Vocabulary: : relating to A 2.Skills: speaking , writing skills 3.Behavior: B. Teaching aids : - Teacher: Text book , pictures . - Student:book, notebook C. Steps of teaching: Teacher’s activities. Students’ activities. * Warm up: (5’) Word Square - Write the word of the square on the board. - Tell the students what the topic is and how many hidden words are there. - Get the students to come to the board and circle any words they can see.. - Look at the word of the square on the board. - Listen to the teacher and answer the teacher questions. + There are 19. Content on the board 1. Revision: C O L L E C T P U P I C K P W O T H R O W L E L D E S T R O Y L O V G R O W O U W A S T E S U T N S D A M A G E cut down, plow, we, you, pollute. collect, pink, throw, destroy, grow, waste, damage..

(183) hidden workds Come to the board and circle any words they can see. 1. Presentation: (10’) Elicit vocabulary  Translation  Translation  Synonym  Explanation. Rub out and remember -Point to the Vietnamese translations and rub out English words. - Get students to call the English words. 2. Practice: (20’) Rub out & remember dialogue - Set the scene: Phuong and Thu are talking about food and drink. - Put the dialogue on the board . - Rub out some of the words . - Get students to isolate the model sentence. - Point to the model sentence and ask : + What shouldn’t we do? + What should we do?. - Word cue drill - Run through the cues. - Hold up the first cues and say the model sentences. S1: We Shouldn’t waste water. S2: We should save water.. - Do the same for the second cue. - Correct their mistakes.. - Listen to teacher . - Repeat after the teacher. - Notice the Vietnamese translation. - Copy in their notebook. - Students repeat chorally and remember all the English words. - Call the English words and write the English words if there is time. - Practice saying the dialogue. - Remember te rubbed out words and keep practicing it. - Repeat the rubbed out dialogue from memory. - Isolate the model sentence. - Listen to the teacher and answer the questions - Take notes.. save. 2 .Presentation: * Vocabulary: -a trash can = a waste basket:thuøng raùc - to put: đặt, để - a lot of = lots = many: nhiều - great (adj): to lớn. * Checking vocabulary:. B4 page 171 Lan : We shouldn’t leave our trash. Ba: What are these going to do? Nga: Put it in a trash can Nam: There aren’t any trash cans. Lan: Then we should put it in a bag and take it home Should/ Shouldn’t + Vinfinitive - Neân / khoâng neân. - Dùng để ai đó. * Practice: - Look at the cues. - Listen to the teacher. - Repeat it chorally and then individually. Make the sentence for themselves. - Practice in pairs. Some pairs. - waste / save / water - waste/ save / power - burn / collect / paper - leave / put it in the the trash can / trash - damage / grow / trees - cut down / grow / forests.

(184) practice in front. put our trash in the trash can plant more trees and damage trees - Listen to the flowers What should we do to make our teacher. school - Students to think green and of some coutry clean? names. - Go to the board and write down collect bottles and cans waste water and power their idea. - Our school should be a beautiful Use the environment . We should Brainstorm to …………………… write a passage about how to make their school green and clean. * Homework: (3’) - Take notes and - Ask students to learn by heart memorize - Vocabulary. vocabulary and “Should / - Do as the teacher - Should / shouldn’t shouldn’t” requests. - Writing. - Have them prepare Unit 16 - Unit 16: Man And The GRAMMAR PRACTICE. Environment – GRAAMAR PRACTICE * Self – evaluation: …………………………………………………………………………………………………… …………………………………………………………………………………………………… …………………………………………………………………………………………………… 3. Production: (7’) - Brainstorm - Ask students to think of How to make our school green. - Get them to go to the board and write down their ideas. - Give feedback. - Ask students to use the Brainstorm for cues for the writing.. Week: 35 Period: 102 Date of planning: 10/04/2014 Date of teaching:. GRAMMAR PRACTICE. A.Objectives: 1. Knowledge:After this period, students will be able to understand the text , use the Present simple tense - Grammar: must, mustn’t - Vocabulary: words relating to lessons. 2. Skills: listening, reading, writing 3. Behavior: B. Teaching Aids: - Text book, pictures, cassette... - Students: textbook……. C. Steps of teaching: 1/ Class oder ( 1’) - Greeting -Checking attendance. 2/ Review ( 6’) -Asks students to write the activity 2 on the board..

(185) 3/ New lesson (32’) *Activity 1: Present simple tense. 5’ Teacher’ activities -Asks students to look at the exercise and guides about the exercise. -Gives the vocabulary.. Pupils’ activities -Look at the exercise, listen and answer the teacher’s questions.. -Look at, listen, give meaning and write down. - asks students to read. -read the lesson -Asks students to correct together. -Correct together. -Explains the exercise. -Listen carefully. -Calls students to gives the -Give the answers. answers. -Asks students to correct together. -Correct together. -Corrects and gives the right -Listen, look at and write down. answers. -Listen carefully. -Explains the exercise. -Give the answers. -Calls students to gives the answers. -Correct together. -Asks students to correct together. -Listen, look at and write down. -Corrects and gives the right answers. -Explains the exercise. -Listen carefully. -Calls students to gives the -Give the answers. answers. -Asks students to correct together. -Correct together. -Corrects and gives the right -Listen, look at and write down. answers. 4/ Consolidation: (4’) -Asks students to write the activity 2 on the board. 5/ Homework: (2’) -Learn by heart vocabulary. -Write the exercises down. - Prepare: Revion. Duyệt của BGH. Duyệt của tổ trưởng. Contents 1: Present simple tense.. *Activity 2: Adverbs ofø frequency.5’ 2: Present progressive tense, Present simple tense *Activity 3: Present progressive tense .5’ 3: adjectives….. *Activity 4: Future: going to. 5’ 4: a few ,a little.

(186) Week: 34 UNIT 16: Period: 98 Sewction: Date of preparing: 20/03/2012 Date of testing:. MAN AND THE ENVIRONMENT ANIMALS AND PLANTS ( A3,R ). I. Aim: 9. Reading a text about farming and getting further practice in a lot, a little, a few. II. Objective: 10. At the end, students can understand the text and use a lot , a little, a few better. III. Teaching aids: 11. Textbook and poster. IV. Procedure: Teacher’s activities Nought and crosses - Put the grid on the board. - Divide class into teams. One is noughts (O) and the other is Crosses (X). - Two teams choose any words in the boxes and ask questions about county names - The team which has three noughts or three crosses on a line will win the game. Elicit vocabulary  Mine  Visual  Translation  Translation Rub out and remember -Point to the Vietnamese translations and rub out English words. - Get students to call the English words. Open prediction - Set the sence: You are going to read a text about Mr Hai’s farming. Now work in pairs and guess about the text . - Ask them to predict 6 things Mr Hai has on his farm and 5 things he produces.. Students’ activities Content on the board - Look at the board. 1.Revision: - Work in groups. 1 - One is noughts (O) and a 2 a dozen 2 the other is Crosses (X). glass of eggs potatoes - Choose any words in milk the boxes, ask and ask 1 4 kilos questions about country kilo 100g.Ric 2 vegetable names : e onions s +There’s a little rice +There’re a lot of eggs. 1 kilo 2 2 flowers fruit tomatoes - Listen to teacher . - Repeat after the teacher. - Notice the Vietnamese translation. - Copy in their notebook. - Students repeat chorally and remember all the English words. - Call the English words and write the English words if there is time. -. 2 .Pre - reading: Vocabulary: - a buffalo : con traâu - a cow : con boø - to flow : Taây Taïng - North Africa : Baéc Phi * Checking vocabulary:. A2 – page166 Listen to the teacher. Guess about the text. - Pedict 6 things Mr Hai has on his farm and 5 things he produces.. Mr Hai has: 1…… 2…… 3…… 4…… 5…… 6…… Mr Hai produces: 1……… 2……… 3……… 4……… 5…………. 2.While reading: - Get students to read the - Read the text and check. Mr Hai has:1.paddy fields 2. a small.

(187) text and check. - Ask students to read the text carefully and answer the questions. Grid - Put the table on the board. - Get students to reread the text then complete the table. - Get students to share the answers with their partners. - Feed back.. Board drill - Ask students to use the Grid above for cues for the drill - Run through the cues. + How many paddy fields does Mr Hai have? + some + How much rice does Mr Hai produce? + a lot - Ask students to learn by heart vocabulary and A lot, a little, a few. - Have them prepare Unit 16 - Lesson 3: (A4&5) : reading a text about the Environment... - Read the text carefully and answer the questions. - Read the table on the board. - Read the text again and complete the table. - Share their answer with their partners.. field 3. fruit tree 4. buffulo 5. cows 6. chicken Mr Hai produces: 1.rice 2. vegetables 3. fruit 4. milk 5. eggs Hai a a a som has/grows lo fe littl e / produces t w e paddy V fields rice V vegetables V fruit trees V fruit V animals V buffalo V cows V milk V chicken V eggs V 4.Post reading:. -Use the Grid above for cues. - Some pairs practice asking and answering before the class, using Wh – questions. - Do some free practice with other rivers and mountains in Viet Nam or others countries Take notes and 5.Homework: memorize - Vocabulary. - Do homework as the - A lot, a little, a few. teacher requests. - Unit 16: Man And The Environment – ANIMAL AND PLANTS - Lesson 3 : (A4 – A5).

(188)

giao an tieng anh

Tài liệu liên quan

Tài liệu bạn tìm kiếm đã sẵn sàng tải về